Worked Examples For The Design of Concrete Buildings ARUP

WORKED
1116
EXAMPLES
OF CONCRETE
oil
BUILDING
r0=
FOR THE DESIGN

S
Based on BSI publication DD ENV 1992-1-1:1992. Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures. Part 1. General rules and rules for buildings.
..:
This book of worked examples has been prepared by:

British Cement Association Ove Arup & Partners
E06
and
S. B. Tietz &
Partners
The work was monitored by the principal authors:

A. W. Beeby BSc, PhD, CEng, MICE, MIStructE, FACI Professor of Structural Design, Dept of Civil Engineering, University of Leeds (formerly Director of Design and Construction, British Cement Association),
.L--
O-0
c0)
Partner, S. B. Tietz & Partners, Consulting Engineers,
and R. Whittle MA(Cantab), CEng, MICE Associate Director, Ove Arup & Partners,
and edited by: A. J. Threlfall BEng, DIC Consultant (formerly a Principal Engineer at the British Cement Association).
This publication was jointly funded by the British Cement Association and the Department of the Environment to promote and assist the use of DD ENV 1992-1-1 Eurocode 2: Part 1.
aa))
a.-
R. S.
Narayanan
(p-
BE(Hons), MSc, DIC, CEng, FIStructE
foil
The British Cement Association, BCA, is a research and information body dedicated to furthering the efficient and proper design and execution of concrete construction. Membership of BCNs Centre for Concrete Information is open to all involved in the construction process. BCA is funded by subscriptions from cement producers, through joint ventures, sales of publications, information and training courses, and the carrying out of research contracts. Full details are available from the Centre for Concrete Information, British Cement Association, Century House, Telford Avenue, Crowthorne, Berkshire RG11 6YS. Telephone (0344) 725700, Fax (0344) 727202.
Qom.
`c_
cio
woo
2-0
.-"
U)-
?l.
Ove Arup industry.

((D
&
Partners is an international firm offering a wide range of design and specialist services for the construction
N:3
S. B. Tietz &
Partners offer consultancy services
A catalogue
and prices for BCA publications can be obtained from Publication Sales, Centre for Concrete Information,
Qom)
at the above address.

43.505 First published 1994 ISBN 0 7210 1446 1
pin
,.:
in civil,
structural and traffic engineering.
Published by
British Cement Association

Century House, Telford Avenue, Crowthorne, Berks RG11 6YS Telephone (0344) 762676
Fax (0344) 761214
From 15 April 1995 the STD Code will be (01344)
J2
Price group M British Cement Association 1994
advice or information from the British Cement Association is intended for those who will evaluate the significance and limitations of its contents and take responsibility for its use and application. No liability (including that for negligence) for any loss resulting from such advice or information is accepted. Readers should note that all BCA publications are subject to revision from time to time and should therefore ensure that they are in possession of the latest version.
50"
m-0
All
(0m
Lma
Nod
..E
odd
0.9
FOR THE DESIGN
OF CONCRETE
BUILD
N G S
Based on BSI publication DD ENV 1992-1-1:1992. Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures. Part 1. General rules and rules for buildings.
Published by the British Cement Association in conjunction with:
Ove Arup
13
&
Partners
Fitzroy Street London W1 P 6BQ

Tel: 071-636 1531
S.B. Tietz & Partners 14 Clerkenwell Close Clerkenwell London ECiR OPQ Tel: 071-490 5050
The Department of the

Environment
2 Marsham Street London SW1P 3EB
Tel: 071-276 3000
July 1994
FOREWORD
Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures, Part 1: General rules and rules for buildings (EC2)(') sets out both the principles for the design of all types of concrete structure, and design rules for buildings. Rules for other types of structure and particular areas of technology, including precast concrete elements and structures, will be covered in other parts of EC2.
x)00
Q(
.-.
EC2 contains a considerable number of parameters for which only indicative values are given. The appropriate values for use in the UK are set out in the National Application Document (NAD)(') which has been drafted by BSI. The NAD also includes a number of amendments to the rules in EC2 where, in the draft for development stage of EC2, it was decided that the EC2 rules either did not apply, or were incomplete. Two such areas are the design for fire resistance and the provision of ties, where the NAD states that the rules in BS 8110(2) should
-CO
be applied.
Attention is drawn to Approved Document A (Structure) related to the Building Regulations 1991(3), which states that Eurocode 2, including the National Application Document, is considered to provide appropriate guidance for the design of concrete buildings in the United Kingdom.
Enquiries of a technical nature concerning these worked examples may be addressed to the authors directly, or through the BCA, or to the Building Research Establishment.
(0^D
3>a)
vii
'Fn
-C-0
ca)
CONTENTS
1
1.1
1.2
INTRODUCTION AND SYMBOLS 5 Introduction 5 Symbols
................. .................... ................
8
8.1
8.2
SPECIAL DETAILS Corbels

Nibs
8.3
180 ..................... 185 188 Simply supported ends
...................
...... ........
2
2.1
COMPLETE DESIGN EXAMPLE 15 Introduction

Basic details of structure,
8.4
9
Surface reinforcement
191
2.2
2.3
materials and loading

2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9
3
3.1
Floor slab Main beam Edge beam (interior span) Columns Foundation Shear wall Staircase
.................. ................. ..... ................... ................. ................. ..................

................
.....
.........
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE
Introduction Design data Serviceability limit state Ultimate limit state
Mi n
i
15
17
9.1
9.2
9.3 9.4
20 30 34 39 43 49
............... ............... ...... ..........
193 193 195
204
9.5
9.6
mum and max mum areas of 207 reinforcement
3.2
3.3
3.4 3.5
4
4.1
4.2
5
5.1
5.2
L(7
(D.
5.3
5.4 5.5
5.6 5.7
CON-
..............
.....
BEAMS
Introduction 53 Design methods for shear 53 Shear resistance with concentrated loads close to support 63 70 Design method for torsion Slenderness limits 81
SLABS
Solid and ribbed slabs Flat slabs
COLUMNS Introduction Capacity check of a section by strain compatibility Biaxial bending capacity of a section Braced slender column Slender column with biaxial bending Classification of structure Sway structures
6
6.1
WALLS Introduction
Example
ca)
10
10.1
10.2 Cracking
(fl
Reinforcement summary
207
SERVICEABILITY CHECKS BY CALCULATION

Deflection
.................
208
.p
.................. 219
........ ..... ...........

.......
DEEP BEAMS Introduction 11.2 Example

11 11.1
12
.................
82
109
12.1
12.2
12.3
............... .......... ..................
132
12.4
132
12.5
137
141
LOAD COMBINATIONS Introduction Example 1 frame Example 2 continuous beam 1 Example 3 continuous beam 2 Example 4
WOE
............... .................. ............... ..................

....... .......
222 222
236
237
COY)
240 243
......
- tank ................... 245

13
.................. ..... ............
143 147
151
13.1
13.2
13.3 13.4 13.5
6.2
............... ..................
.............
.....
154 154
DESIGN OF BEAM AND COLUMN SECTIONS Concrete grades 246 Singly reinforced rectangular beam sections 246 Compression reinforcement ... 248 Flanged beams 249 Symmetrically reinforced rectangular columns 249
7
7.1
7.2
FOUNDATIONS Ground bearing footings Pilecap design
158 172
REFERENCES
........... .............. ............ ........ .................
-fl
256
:-I
INTRODUCTION AND SYMBOLS

1.1
Introduction and symbols

The main objective of this publication is to illustrate through worked examples how EC20) may be used in practice. It has been prepared for engineers who are generally familiar with design practice in the UK, particularly to BS 8110(2).
The worked examples relate primarily to in-situ concrete building structures. The designs are in accordance with EC2: Part 1 as modified by the UK National Application Document'). Where necessary, the information given in EC2 has been supplemented by guidance taken from other documents.
The core example, in Section 2, is a re-design of the in-situ concrete office block used in the BCA publication Designed and detailed (SS 8110: 1985), by Higgins & Rogers(). Other design aspects and forms of construction are fully explored by means of further examples in Sections 3 to 12.
CAD
Equations and charts for the design of beam and column sections, taken from the Concise Eurocode for the design of concrete buildings(5), are given in Section 13. Publications used in the preparation of this book, and from which further information may be obtained, are listed in the References. Unless otherwise stated, all references to BS 8110 refer to Part 1.
wow
>-o
((DD
(Q,
moo-
W-0
-CD
been adopted in the preparation of this book. Statements followed by OK' mark places where the calculated value is shown to be satisfactory, Green type is used to draw attention to key information such as the reinforcement to be provided.
Two conventions have
'.......
The calculations are cross-referenced to the relevant clauses in EC2 and, where appropriate, to other documents; all references in the right-hand margins are to EC2 unless indicated otherwise.
The symbols used throughout the publication are listed and defined below, and are generally those used in EC2 itself.
-pp
1.2 Symbols
A
Ac
Act
Act,ext
Area of cross-section
Area of concrete cross-section
Area of concrete within tensile zone

Area of concrete tensile zone external to links
Ak
AP
Area enclosed within centre-line of thin-walled section Area of prestressing tendons Area of tension
or, in
As
columns, total longitudinal reinforcement

E
A's
As,min
Area of compression reinforcement
Minimum area of tension or, in columns, total longitudinal reinforcement
As, prov
As,feq
As,surf
Area of tension reinforcement provided

Area of tension reinforcement required
Area of surface reinforcement
Ast
Area of transverse reinforcement within flange of beam Area of tension reinforcement effective at a section of additional longitudinal reinforcement
E
ivy
CD-
(OD
((DD
J7-
Coa
c>3
L_i
0;Y
Qom)
tea)
__0
As/
Asw
Asw,min
or,
for torsion,
area
Area of shear reinforcement or torsion links Minimum area of shear reinforcement

Effective modulus of elasticity of concrete
E.,eff
Er
E ,,
ES
Secant modulus
of elasticity of
concrete at transfer
Secant modulus of elasticity of concrete
Modulus of elasticity of reinforcement or prestressing steel

Force due to concrete in compression at ultimate limit state
F
FS
Force in tension reinforcement or prestressing tendons at ultimate limit state
FSd
Design value of tie force in pilecap

Design value of support reaction
Tie force in corbel or due to accidental action
Fsd,sup
Ft
F
Gk
Gkf
Vertical force applied to corbel or, for sway classification of structures, sum of all vertical loads under service conditions
Characteristic value of permanent action or dead load Characteristic dead floor load Characteristic dead roof load
Overall depth of tank
Horizontal force applied to corbel
..,
--E
Gkr
H
Hc
I
It
Second moment of area of cross-section
Second moment Second moment Second moment

E E E E E
of of of of of of
area of uncracked concrete section area of cracked concrete section area of beam section area of concrete section
Iu
Ib
Second moment
I..,
slab
Second moment
Second moment
v J
Jtot
Second moment of Second moment of
area area area area
of column section of slab section

of
section
in x
direction
of section in y direction
St Venant torsional stiffness of rectangular section St Venant torsional stiffness of total section
K
K,
K2
Deflection-curvaturefactor dependent upon the shape of the bending moment
diagram
Reduction factor for calculation of second order eccentricity
Coefficient taking account of decrease force

CD.
in
curvature due to increasing axial
M
Mc
Mc,
MCX
Bending moment Moment of force, FC, about tension reinforcement
Moment causing cracking

Moment of force, Nc, about x axis
MCy
Moment of force, N., about y axis

First order moment
M.
MRd
MRd,c
Design moment of resistance
Moment of force,
NRd,c'
about mid-depth of section
M/Rd,c
MRd,s
Moment of force, N'Rd,c' about mid-depth of section
Moment of force,
NRd,s'
MSd
Design value of applied moment

Design moment in x direction
Msdx
MSdy
MShc
Design moment in y direction

First order moment at end
(1)
On.
Msd2
Msd,cs
MSd,ms
First order moment at end 2
Design moment in column strip

Design moment in middle strip
Mspan
Moment in span
SUP
Moment at support
Mt",,.
MX
E
Maximum moment transfer value
Moment about x axis Moment about y axis

Axial force
M
N
N
NRd
NRd,c
Axial force due to concrete in compression
Design resistance to axial force
Design resistance to axial force due to concrete

Design resistance to axial force due to concrete of hypothetical section of depth x > h
N'Rd,c
Design resistance to axial force due to reinforcement

Design value of applied axial force
Mean applied axial force
Prestressing force or point load

Average prestressing force along tendon profile
Initial prestressing force at transfer
Mean effective prestressing force at time t

Final prestressing force after all losses
Maximum initial prestressing force at active end of tendon
Required prestressing force

Final prestressing force at service
Characteristic value of variable action or imposed load Characteristic value of imposed floor load Characteristic value of imposed roof load
Reaction at support A
Reaction at support B
First moment of area of reinforcement about centroid of section
First moment of area of reinforcement about centroid of uncracked section First moment of area of reinforcement about centroid of cracked section
Design value of tensile force in longitudinal reinforcement

Maximum torsional moment resisted by concrete struts Maximum torsional moment resisted by reinforcement
Tsd
Tsd,e Tsd,tot
_`L
Design value of applied torsional moment

Torsional moment applied to flange
Total applied torsional moment
Tsd
VA
Torsional moment applied to web
Shear force at support A
VB
Vod
Vex,
Shear force at support B

Design shear resistance provided by concrete Shear force at exterior support
Vnt
VRdl
VRd2 VRd3
Shear force at interior support Design shear resistance of member without shear reinforcement
Maximum design shear force to avoid crushing of notional concrete struts
Design shear resistance of member with shear reinforcement

Design value of applied shear force
Design shear force in x direction Design shear force in y direction
COD COD COD
Vsd
Vsdx Vsdy
Vsd,max
Maximum design shear force

Design shear resistance provided by shear reinforcement
V,d
Wb
Section modulus at bottom fibre
Wcp
Wk
Section modulus at centroid of tendons Characteristic value of wind load

Section modulus at top fibre
Wt
a
al all
ac
acs a,
0-.
Distance or deflection or maximum drape of tendon profile

Deflection based on uncracked section Deflection based on cracked section
Distance of load from face of support (corbel) or from centre-line of hanger bars
(nib)
Deflection due to concrete shrinkage Distance from face of support to effective centre of bearing
COD COD
al
ato,
av
ax
0-_
Horizontal displacement of the envelope line of tensile force
Total deflection
Distance between positions of zero and maximum bending

COD
Deflection at distance x along span
aj,a2
Values of ai at ends of span

Width of section or flange width or lateral cover in plane of lap
b
bav
be
betf
bmin
Average width of trapezoidal compression zone

Width of effective moment transfer strip
Effective width of flange
Minimum width of support beam Width of rib Width of support
br
bsup
COD
bt
bW
Mean width of section over the tension zone
Minimum width of section over the effective depth Cover to longitudinal torsion reinforcement
c
ct,c2
Support widths at ends of beam

Effective depth of section
d'
day
Depth to compression reinforcement

Average effective depth for both directions
db
dcnt
c"'-
Depth to bar considered

Distance of critical section for punching shear from centroid of column
Effective depth of flange Effective depth for punching shear check in column head
df
dm
dm.
dmin
'PL
Maximum effective depth for both directions Minimum effective depth for both directions
Effective depth in x direction Effective depth in y direction
dX
dy
d,
d2
ea
eay
Effective depth to bars in layer
Effective depth to bars in layer 2
Additional eccentricity due to geometrical imperfections Additional eccentricity in the y direction Additional eccentricity in the z direction
Q1)
eaz
ee
eoy
Equivalent eccentricity at critical section

First order eccentricity in y direction First order eccentricities at ends of column
Total eccentricity
eot,eo2
etot
ey
eZ
Eccentricity in y direction Eccentricity in z direction
e2 e2y
Second order eccentricity Second order eccentricity in y direction Second order eccentricity in z direction
Stress in concrete at bottom fibre
e2,
fb
fbd
Design value of ultimate bond stress Design cylinder strength of concrete
cd
f
t
k
Cube strength of concrete at transfer

Characteristic cylinder strength of concrete
ct,eff
Effective tensile strength of concrete at time cracking is expected to occur
f tm 1
fpd
Mean value of axial tensile strength of concrete

Characteristic cube strength of concrete
Design tensile strength of prestressing steel
fk
Characteristic tensile strength of prestressing steel
Design value of ultimate bearing stress

Stress in reinforcement Stress in concrete at top fibre
Design yield strength of reinforcement
Characteristic yield strength of reinforcement

Design yield strength of longitudinal torsion reinforcement
Design yield strength of shear reinforcement or torsion links

Characteristic yield strength of shear reinforcement or torsion links
Characteristic dead load per unit area

Overall depth of section or liquid in tank
Reduced value of h for separate check about minor axis with biaxial eccentricities
ha
of column section
Active height of deep beam

Overall depth of corbel at face of support Overall depth of flange
hC
hf
hH
Depth of column head

Larger dimension of rectangular section
hmax
hmin htot
Smaller dimension of rectangular section

Total height of structure in metres
i
k
kA kB
kbottom
ko
Radius of gyration of section
Coefficient or factor Restraint coefficient at end A

Restraint coefficient at end B Restraint coefficient at bottom
Minimum reinforcement coefficient associated with stress distribution

Restraint coefficient at top
ktop
ki
Crack spacing coefficient associated with bond characteristics
k2
Crack spacing coefficient associated with strain distribution

Length or span Length of tendon over which anchorage slip is taken up
l
if
Ib
Ib,min
Basic anchorage length

Minimum anchorage length
Ib,net
IC
Required anchorage length
Diameter of circular column

Height of column between centres of restraints
Effective span Effective span of slab
Icon
left
leff,slab
lH
In
Distance from column face to edge of column head
Clear distance between faces of support
10
to
Distance between positions of zero bending or effective height of column or, for deep beams, clear distance between faces of support
Length of compression flange between lateral supports
lot
is
ls,min
Required lap length or floor to ceiling height in metres Minimum lap length
It
Greater of distances in metres between centres of columns, frames or walls supporting any two adjacent floor spans in direction of tie under consideration
Effective span in x direction Effective span in y direction
COD
lX
ly
1,,12
Lengths between centres of supports or overall dimensions of rectangular column head
c(0
u0)
mSd
Minimum design moment per unit width
Ultimate design load per unit area or number of tendons or number of
sub-divisions
p'
q
qk
Average loss of prestressing force per unit length due to friction

Equivalent load per unit length due to prestressing force profile
...
Characteristic imposed load per unit area Radius of bend or radius of curvature Radius of curvature based on uncracked section Radius of curvature based on cracked section Radius of curvature due to concrete shrinkage Radius of curvature due to concrete shrinkage based on uncracked section Radius of curvature due to concrete shrinkage based on cracked section
Total radius of curvature
(DD
r
rI
rH
r,
rcsu
riot
n""
r.I
s
sf
Smax
Srm
Spacing of shear reinforcement or torsion links or horizontal length of tendon profile
Spacing
of
transverse reinforcement within flange of beam
Maximum spacing of shear reinforcement or torsion links
Average final crack spacing

Thickness of supporting element or wall of thin-walled section Minimum thickness of wall
t
train
u
uk
VRdl
Circumference of concrete section or critical section for punching shear Circumference of area Ak
Design shear resistance per unit length shear reinforcement
0)8
of critical perimeter, for
'-.
r-.
-f6
VRd3
VSd
Design value of shear force per unit length of critical perimeter
w
wk
Support width or quasi-permanent load per unit length

Design crack width
0
CAD
'23
slab without
VRd2
Maximum design shear resistance per unit length of critical perimeter, for slab with shear reinforcement
Design shear resistance per unit length shear reinforcement
of critical perimeter, for
slab with
wmin
Minimum width of support
xc
Depth of concrete in compression at position of minor axis for column section with biaxial eccentricities
y
yt
Drape of tendon at distance x along profile or column dimension direction

Distance from centroid of uncracked section to extreme tension fibre
Lever arm of internal forces
07Q
x'
Maximum depth of concrete in compression in direction of minor axis for column section with biaxial eccentricities
5'3
z
ZCP
an
imperfections
aWasy
Moment coefficients in x and y directions

Effectiveness coefficient for lap
a,
Coefficient with several applications including shear resistance enhancement, effective height of column, St Venant torsional stiffness, punching shear magnification, design crack width
ared
Reduced value
'-'
CC))
yG,inf
yG,sup
Partial safety factor for permanent action, in calculating upper design value
yP
To
'YS
Partial safety factor for actions associated with prestressing force

Partial safety factor for variable action or imposed load
Partial safety factor for steel material properties of reinforcement or
prestressing tendons
Ratio of redistributed moment to moment before redistribution
Strain in concrete at bottom of section
S
Eb
ECS
Basic concrete shrinkage strain

Final concrete shrinkage strain
EeS-
EP
Minimum strain in tendons to achieve design tensile strength

Strain in tendons corresponding to prestressing force
Pm,t
EPm
E 'C$
Neutral axis depth or distance along span from face along tendon or column dimension in x direction
of
support or distance
in y
Distance from centroid of section to centroid of tendons
a
aI
Reduction factor for concrete compressive stress or modular ratio or deformation parameter
Value of parameter based on uncracked section

Value of parameter based on cracked section
au
as
ae
Effectiveness coefficient for anchorage

Effective modular ratio
Reduction coefficient for assumed inclination of structure due to
of
shear resistance enhancement coefficient
a,
a2
-y'
Coefficient associated with bond characteristics

Coefficient associated with duration of load
Partial safety factor for concrete material properties
yF
TG
Partial safety factor for actions

Partial safety factor for permanent action or dead load Partial safety factor for permanent action, in calculating lower design value
u'
ES
Strain in reinforcement
es(t,t)
esm
EU
Estimated concrete shrinkage strain Mean strain in reinforcement allowing for tension stiffening effect of concrete
Ultimate compressive strain in concrete

Initial yield strain in reinforcement
Eyd
Distribution coefficient
n
Moment coefficient
6
X Xcrit Xm
Xmin
Angle of rotation or angle between concrete struts and longitudinal axis
Slenderness ratio
Critical slenderness ratio Mean slenderness ratio of all columns in storey considered
Slenderness ratio beyond which column is considered slender Coefficient of friction between tendon and duct or applied moment ratio Limiting value of applied moment ratio for singly reinforced section
(OD
lim
P
Efficiency factor or assumed inclination of structure due to imperfections
vred
YU
Reduced value of assumed inclination

Longitudinal force coefficient
ate)
of
structure
Tension reinforcement ratio or density of liquid
P'
PI
Compression reinforcement ratio

Longitudinal tension reinforcement ratio Longitudinal tension reinforcement ratios in x and y directions
Effective reinforcement ratio
(n.
PIX'PIy
Pr
Pw
Pw,min
Shear reinforcement ratio
Minimum shear reinforcement ratio
P1,P2
UC9
b0)
Principal and secondary reinforcement ratios in solid slabs
Stress in concrete adjacent to tendons due to self-weight and any other permanent actions
Average stress in concrete due to axial force
Initial stress in concrete adjacent to tendons due to prestress
app
acpo
upo
stress in tendons immediately after stressing (pre-tensioning) or immediately after transfer (post-tensioning)
Initial
as
asr
7' TRd
Stress
in
tension reinforcement calculated on basis of cracked section
Value of as under loading conditions causing first cracking

Basic design shear strength
Factor defining representative value of variable action

,yo
Value of
Value of
for rare load combination for frequent loading
0t
02
W
Value of 0 for quasi-permanent loading
Mechanical ratio of tension reinforcement

Mechanical ratio of compression reinforcement
W'
(On
00..
wl.m
Limiting value of w for singly reinforced section

Total vertical force
E.
applied to frame at floor
A,/
AFd
OHM
Anchorage slip or wedge set

Variation of longitudinal force in section of flange over distance
Equivalent horizontal force acting on frame at floor imperfections

Moment of force
cctea)
c,)
a,
due to assumed
o-
AMRd,c
ANRd,c
AMSd
ANRd,c
Reduction in design moment at support
Design resistance to axial force due to concrete in area of hypothetical section lying outside actual section Average loss of prestressing force due to elastic deformation of concrete
Loss of prestressing force at active end of tendon due to anchorage slip Loss of prestressing force due to creep, shrinkage and relaxation at time t Loss of prestressing force due to friction between tendon and duct at distance x from active end of tendon
Variation of stress in tendon due to relaxation
Bar size or duct diameter or creep coefficient
((DD
-_p
APC
APst
APt(t)
APA(x)
DTT
0o pr
0(t,to)
Creep coefficient, defining creep between times t and
to,
related to elastic
deformation at 28 days
0(-,td
Final creep coefficient
COMPLETE DESIGN EXAMPLE

2.1
Introduction
Design calculations for the main elements of a simple in-situ concrete office block are set out. The structure chosen is the same as that used in Higgins and Rogers' Designed and detailed (BS 8110: 1985)t4i. Calculations are, wherever possible, given in the same order as those in Higgins and Rogers enabling a direct comparison to be made between BS 8110(2) and EC20) designs. For the same reason, a concrete grade C32/40 is used. This is not a standard grade recognized by EC2 or ENV 200), which gives grade C35/45 in Table NA.1. Some interpolation of the tables in EC2 has, therefore, been necessary.
ma`
+-O
(Nn
0)-
0)-
The example was deliberately chosen to be simple and to cover a considerable range of member types. Comparison shows that, for this type of simple structure, there is very little difference between BS 8110 and EC2 in the complexity of calculation necessary or the results obtained.
2.2 Basic details of structure, materials and loading

These are summarized in Table
Table 2.1
2.1
'Or
and Figure 2.1.
Design information
Intended use
Laboratory and office block

Fire resistance
1
hour for all elements

.r.
Loading (excluding self-weight of structure)

Roof
imposed (kN/m2) finishes (kN/m2)
(<D
(ca
Floors Stairs
External cladding (kN/m)
Wind load
Speed (m/sec) 40
1.5 1.5
imposed including partition allowance (kN/m2) finishes (kN/m2)

imposed (kN/m2) finishes (kN/m2)
ma)
4.0 0.5
4.0 0.5 5.0
Factors
s,
1.0
s2
s3
0.83
1.0
1.1
C,
Exposure class 2b (external) and

fin
1
(internal)
Subsoil conditions
Stiff clay
no sulphates Allowable bearing pressure (kN/m2)
200
Foundation type
Reinforced concrete footings to columns and walls
Materials
Grade C32/40 concrete with 20 mm maximum aggregate Characteristic strength of main bars (Nlmm2) Characteristic strength of links (N/mm2) Self-weight of concrete (kN/m3)
460 250 24
ate)
-0--
...
'a)
m`0
Ca
5000=40,000
16000
S
stair
0 o
0009
(2
C
a
0000
0 0
175
0008
slab
1--
175
wall
O
175
wall
TYPICAL FLOOR PLAN
Notes
1.
All columns
Main beams
Edge beams
300 x
500
x
300 300
300
2. 3.
350 x
4
5000 0005
1
Internal column bases

2750
x
2750
600
TYPICAL CROSS SECTION
Notes
1.
wind force resisted by end shear walls

5
I
wind direction
2.
Lateral bracing in E+W direction provided by staircase, and infill masonry panels, on grid 1/H-J, and grid 3/H-J
WING
RESISTANCE
-nt.
P
Key
Int.
Int.
Int.
Int.
Int.
Int.
C
Peripheral tie tie -Column (external) tie
- Internal - Wall
(external) tie
C.
TIE
Ft
PROVISION
-horizontal ties
=
(20+4no)
20+16=
36
c60kN
Figure 2.1
Structural details
16
fl- t/!
2.3 Floor slab

2.3.1 Idealization
of structure
Consider as a one-way continuous slab on knife-edge supports and design a typical 5 m interior span where
fck fyk
=
=
32 N/mm2
460 N/mm2
131
2.3.2 Cover for durability and fire resistance
ZI-
Nominal cover for exposure class
(internal) is 20 mm.
NAD
4.1.3.3
Table 6
Cover should not be less than the bar size when 20 mm maximum aggregate size is used.
175 mm slab with 20 mm cover will give 1.5 hours fire
resistance.... OK
Use 20 mm nominal cover bottom and top
NAD 6.1(a) BS 8110 Table 3.5 & Figure 3.2

&
2.3.3 Loading
Self-weight of slab
Finishes
Characteristic permanent load
Characteristic variable load (q k) =

Design permanent load Design variable load = =
1.35
1.5
2.3.4 Design moments and shears

Moments have been obtained using moment coefficients given in Reynolds and Steedman's Reinforced concrete designer's handbook('), Table 33.
(I)
ac)
Support moment
Span moment =
Design shear force
2.3.5 Reinforcement
2.3.5.1
Support
Assume effective depth
M
= 0.040 =
175
Asyk
0.175 x 24
4.2 kN/m2
0.5 kN/m2
(gk)
4.7 kN/m2
4.0 kN/m2
x 4.7
4.0
= 6.35 kN/m2
=
6.0 kN/m2
Table 2.2
0.079
x 6.35 x
52 + 0.106
6.0
52
28.4 kNm/m
0.046 x 6.35 x 52 + 0.086 x 6.0 x 52
= 20.2 kNm/m
E
0.5
x 6.35 x
5 + 0.6
x 6.0 x 5
33.9 kN/m
20
= 149 mm
bd2fck
0.048,
bdck
x/d
0.092 (Section 13, Table 13.1)
For zero redistribution, x/d should be less than 0.45 As =
..............
OK
2.5.3.4.2(5)
498 mm2/m
E
Minimum area of reinforcement 0.6btd

?- 0.0015
t
btd
224 mm2/m
.....................
OK
5.4.2.1.1(1)
E E
yk
Use T12 @ 200 mm crs. (565 mm2/m)
2.3.5.2 Span
M
bd 2f,:k
AS
Yk
0.028
0,033,
x/d =
bdick
A5
342 mm2/m
Use T12 @ 300 mm crs. (377 mm2/m)
Note: Reinforcement areas differ somewhat from those given by BS 8110 which permits design for the single load case of maximum load on all spans combined with 20% redistribution. EC2 requires alternate and adjacent spans to be considered. In this instance, no redistribution has been carried out but it would have been permissible to carry out 30% redistribution in the EC2 design. This would have resulted in an identical answer to that given by BS 8110 but ductility class H (as defined in prEN 10080(8)) reinforcement would need to be specified.
-o:(D
>"O
CAD
(CA
NAD
Table 5
(OD
2.3.6 Shear
Shear resistance
VRd1
of
the slab without shear reinforcement is given by

+ 40pl) bwd
(OD
4.3.2.3
TRdk (1.2
Eqn 4.18
where
TRd
0.35 N/mm2
Table 4.8
= 1.6
d =
1.6
0.149 = 1.451 0. 0038
565
Pi
1000 x 149
Hence
VRd1
102.3 kN/m
> Vsd = 33.9 kN/m
...... .........
OK
No shear reinforcement required
Note: Since shear is rarely a problem for normally loaded solid slabs supported on beams, as the calculation has shown, it is not usually necessary to check in
these instances.
COD
2.3.7 Deflection
Reinforcement ratio provided in span
= 377 1000 x 149
0.0025
Using NAD Table 70) and interpolating between 48 for 0.15% and 35 for 0.5%, a basic span/effective depth ratio of 44 is given. By modifying according to the steel stress, the ratio becomes
'2O
_.a
NAD
Table 7
4.4.3.2(4)
44 (400 x 377)
460 x 342
(OD
42.2
The actual spanleffective depth ratio is
5000
149
33.6
...........
OK
Had EC2 Table 4.14 been used instead of NAD Table 7, the basic ratio before modification would have been 35, which would not have been OK.
2.3.8 Cracking
For minimum area of reinforcement assume
fot,ett
4.4.2.2
3 N/mm2
kC k
Act
= =
=
0.4
0.8
0.5
x 175
1000
87500 mm2
E
Hence
As
=
=
kckfct ettA ct/as
Eq n 4.78
0.4
0.8
x 3 x 87500/460
x
=
E
183 mm2/m
Area of reinforcement provided
No further check is necessary as h
Maximum bar spacing
x
k
377 mm2/m
=
175
<_
..................
200 mm
E
OK
4.4.2.3(1)
3h
500 mm
......................
NAD
OK
Table 3
5.4.3.2.1(4)
2.3.9 Tie provisions

The NAD requires that ties are provided in accordance with BS 8110.
Internal tie in E-W direction, with Ft
Tie force = Ft x
poi
NAD 6.5(g)
36 kN/m width, is given by
(9+
7.5
qk
`l
5
36 x
(4.7 + 4)
7.5
41.8 kN/m
10o
BS 8110 3.12.3.4
Minimum area
41.8
103
91
mm2/m
460
Thus this area of the bottom reinforcement is the minimum that should be made continuous throughout the slab.
E
2.3.10 Reinforcement details

The reinforcement details are shown in Figure 2.2.
PLAN
(grid
omitted for clarity)

X4,5 Alt,
Alt. =
alternate bars
4,5 Alt.
T
Y-F2,3
Alt.
I
1
ir-'
A-A
B-B
COVER
to outer bars =20
Figure 2.2
Slab reinforcement details
2.4 Main beam

2.4.1 Cover
for durability and fire resistance

1
Nominal cover for exposure class
(internal) is 20 mm.
NAD Table 6
BS 8110
Nominal cover for
hour fire resistance is 20 mm.
Table 3.5
Use 20 mm nominal cover to links
2.4.2 Loading
Permanent load from slab (Section 2.3.3) = 4.7 x 5 = 23.5 kNlm
Self-weight of beam
(0.5
0.175) x 0.3 x 24
= = 25.8 kN/m
5 x 4
2.3 kN/m
Characteristic permanent load Characteristic imposed load
(gk)
(qk)
20 kN/m
Maximum design load

Minimum design load
1.35 9k + 1.5gk
64.8 kN/m
2.3.3.1
= 1.35 9k
= 34.8 kN/m
2.3.2.3.(4)
2.4.3 Analysis
2.4.3.1 Idealization
of structure and load cases

2.5.3.3
The structure is simplified as a continuous beam attached to columns above and below, which are assumed to be fixed at their upper ends and pinned at
the foundations, as shown in Figure 2.3.
175
3500
00
,
8000
Figure 2.3 Idealization of structure
2.4.3.2 Design moments and shears These are summarized in Table 2.2 and Figures 2.4 and 2.5.
0
5000
6000 4000
Table 2.2
Results of frame analysis

Load case
1
Load case 2
64.8 34.8
109 72
Load case 3
34.8 64.8
50 33
(1)
Load per m on 8 m span (kN) Load per m on 6 m span (kN)
64.8 64.8
103 68
Upper LH column moment (kNm) Lower LH column moment (kNm)

LH end of 8 m span moment (kNm) LH end of 8 m span shear (W)
-48
N-+
Middle of 8 m span moment (kNm)

nom
RH end of 8 m span moment (kNm) RH end of 8 m span shear (kN)
286
280
CJ)
Upper centre column moment (kNm) Lower centre column moment (kNm)
LH end of 6 m span moment (kNm) LH end of 6 m span shear (kN)
Middle of 6 m span moment (kNm)

E
RH end of 6 m span moment (kNm) RH end of 6 m span shear (kN)
Upper RH column moment (kNm) Lower RH column moment (kNm)
REDISTRIBUTION AT
--'
Case
Reduce 382 to 268

Case
23-
Reduce 180 to
126
(-30%) (-30%)
1 )
Reduce 345 to
Case
No
268 (see
((D
Figure 2.4 Bending moment envelope
-0-0
-171
233
-180
238
- 82
119 116
242
256
-382
33
18
-345
-242
159
3 2
(f)
cam
55 29
-331
240
-262
146
-247
c+)
C`')
I--
223 130
98
20
- 57
149
-12
63
7
- 76
166 46 30
Envelope Moments in kNm
--o
34 22
O7
AND
-Reduce
171 to
126 (see 2)
382
(1)
redistribution
325
22
63
(2)
149 (1)
166
(3)
Figure 2.5 Shear force envelope
2.4.4 Reinforcement for flexure

2.4.4.1 Internal
support
From bending moment envelope
M
6
= 268 kNm
000)
= 0.7 and x/d = 0.0864 and

=
<_
(S
0.44)/1.25
= 0.208
2.5.3.4.2 Eqn 2.17
1im
wiim
0.1084 (Section 13, Table 13.2)

106
M
bd2 fck
268 x
300 x 4402 x 32
0.1442
>
Iim
Therefore compression reinforcement is required

w
A'sfyk
A-N1im
0.1442
0.87
(1
bd,k
YOU
0.87
(1- d'/d)
- 0.0864 - 50/440)
0.0750 (Section 13)

AS
yk
bd ,k
AS
wllm
0.1834 x 300 x 440 x 32/460
+ w' = 0.1084 + 0.0750 = 0.1834 (Section 13)
ado
1684 mm2
Since
d'lx =
d'/0.208d = 0.546
>
(1
yk/805)
0.429
Increase w' to (1
1
0.429)
0.546
0.075
0.0943
A'
0.0943 x 300 x 440 x 32/460

E
866 mm2
E
Use 4T25 (1960 mm2) top

Use 2T25 (982 mm2) bottom
2.4.4.2 Near middle of 8 m span

325 kNm
Effective flange width
300 + 0.2 x 0.85 x 8000
1660 mm
2.5.2.2.1
E E
Eqn 2.13
325 x 106
1660 x 4502 x 32
0.030
x/d =
Neutral axis is in flange since x

w
31
<
175 mm
AS
0.035 x 1660 x 450
(Y)
32/460
1819 mm2
Use 4T25 (1960 mm2)

E
2.4.4.3 Left-hand end of 8 m span

M
S
= =
126 kNm
0.7 and
,.m
0.0864 (Section 13, Table 13.2)

106
It
_
300
126
x 4402
x 32
0.0678
<
lim
Therefore no compression reinforcement is required.
= 0.084 (Section 13, Table 13.1)

= 0.084 x 300 x 440 x 32/460
AS
772 mm2
Using 2T25 bent-up bars, minimum diameter of mandrel
5.2.1.2
NAD
130 (As,regIA,.prov)
100
Table 8
Use 2T25 (982 mm2) with r = 50
24
2.4.4.4 Right-hand end of 6 m span

76kNm
M
76 x 106
0.041
bd2 ck
W
300 x 4402 x 32
= 0.049 (Section 13, Table 13.1) 450 mm2

=
AS =
Use 2T25 (982 mm2) with r

E
4 minimum
2.4.4.5 Near middle of 6 m span

138 kNm
Effective flange width
=
138
300 + 0.2
x
106
0.85
x 6000 = 1320 mm
E
u
=
=
1320
0.0161
32
4502
As
= 0.019
1320
450
x 32/460 =
785 mm2
Use 2T25 (982 mm 2)
2.4.4.6 Minimum reinforcement

As
kc kfct,eff A
07c
ct
/a s
4.4.2.2
Eq n 4.78
where kC = = =
0.4
k
ct.eff
0.68
3 N/mm2
Act
or
S
= 300
=
x 325 mm2
E E
CY)
460 N/mm2
Therefore
AS 0.6b d
t
>_
173 mm2
....................................
= 203 mm2
OK
0.0015 btd
_o'
.......................
OK
5.4.2.1.1(1)
fYk
2.4.5 Shear reinforcement

2.4.5.1 Minimum links
Here, for comparison with BS 8110 design, grade 250 reinforcement will be
4.3.2
5.4.2.2
used. Interpolation from EC2 Table 5.5 gives
Minimum
pW
= =
0.0022 0.0022
A3W Is
If Vsd
300
0.66 mm2/mm
E
VRd2
<
=
5)
VRd2
refer to Section 2.4.5.3 for
smax
lesser of 300 mm or 0.8d
300 mm =
0.75 mm2/mm)
Eqn 5.17
Use R12 links @ 300 mm crs. (AsW/s
2.4.5.2 Capacity of section without shear reinforcement

VRd,
4.3.2.3
7Rdk(1.2
+ 40pl) bald
Assume 2T25 effective

pi
= 982/(300
x
=
440)
0.00743
k
k
=
=
1.6-d
0.35
1.6-0.44
1.16
TRd
Table 4.8
VRdl
= 300 x 440 x 0.35 x 1.16 x (1.2 + 40 x 0.00743)
x 10-3 = 80.2
kN
2.4.5.3 Shear reinforcement by standard method
Maximum capacity of section

v
.R+
4.3.2.4.3
0.7
ck/200
0.7
32/200
0.54
0.5
Eq n 4.21
VRd2
0.5 x 0.54 x (32/1.5) x 300
x 0.9 x 440 x 10-3 = 684 kN
Eqn 4.25
4.3.2.2(10)
Design shear force is shear at a distance d from the face of the support. This is 590 mm from the support centreline.
A SW
s
0.9
CC)
Vsd
80.2
0.87
x 440
x 250
= 0.0116 (Vsd
Eqn 4.23
80.2)
Design of shear reinforcement is summarized in Table 2.3.
Table 2.3
Location
8
Design of shear reinforcement

Vsa
A.Is
s for 12 mm links
Links
223
span
LH end RH end
203
1.42
248
1.95
159 116
R12 @ 150 R12 @ 100
m span LH end RH end

6
S23
202
128
1.41
160
min.
max.
R12 @ 150 R12 @ 300

R12 @ 300
Minimum
2.4.6 Deflection
Reinforcement percentage at centre of 8 m span
4.4.3.2
100
1960/(450
1660)
0.26%
NAD
Interpolating between 0.15 and 0.5%, basic span/effective depth ratio for end span = 40
0
-Ca
Table 7
To modify for
steel stress multiply by 400/460
To To
modify for T section multiply by 0.8 modify for span > 7 m multiply by
0
a`)
Q0)
Therefore permissible ratio

E
Actual ratio
2.4.7 Cracking
For estimate of steel stress under quasi-permanent loads
Ultimate load
Assuming 02
Quasi-permanent load
(nn
Approx. steel stress at midspan =
Approx. steel stress at supports allowing for 30% redistribution =

196/0.7
These are conservative figures since they do not allow for excess reinforcement over what is needed or for moment calculated at centreline of support rather than at face of support. Check limits on either bar size or spacing.
3C.
From EC2 Table 4.11, 25 mm bars in spans are satisfactory at any spacing since steel stress < 200 N/mm2 OK
01
From EC2 Table 4.12, bar spacing at supports should be <_ 150 mm with no limitation on size. As bars are located inside column bars the maximum possible spacing is 125 mm OK
718
0 E
= =
40 x (400/460) x 0.8 x 7/8

17.8
24.3
8000/450
...........................
OK
4.4.2.2
= 64.8 kN/m
= =
0.3 0.3
NAD
x 20 + 25.8 =
460
1.15
31.8 kN/m
Table
31.8
196 N/mm2
64.8
280 N/mm2
E
...................................
4.4.2.3
TOO
.........................................
27
2.4.8 Curtailment of reinforcement

Reinforcement must extend for a distance of ar + envelope where
a,
1b,
net
beyond the moment
5.4.2.1.3
0.9d/2
25 4
198 mm
Ib,net
460
1.15
782 mm
E
5.2.3.4.1
3.2
aj
Ib,net
980 mm
Bars mark 8, which are located outside the web, must extend a further 150 mm refer to Figure 2.8.
077

Curtailment of the main reinforcement and arrangement of the link reinforcement are shown in Figures 2.6 and 2.7. Reinforcement details are shown in Figure 2.8 and given in Table 2.4.
5.4.2.1.3
c')
Figure 2.6 Curtailment diagram of main reinforcement
147kN
Figure 2.7 Arrangement of link reinforcement
150
U-bars
Z
L
Links
3000
2T16-
2725 Side cover

2T25-1
150
150
200-
2725-2
500
-005
SL
Main beam reinforcement details

2T25-7 2T25-8 L-SZIZ
OSLL
225
1750
_H-
71 R12
Ca)
300
100
(a) 300
2T16-9
2T25-4
200
Cover
00
OOE
300
150
250
to
links
OOE
LL
OOE
Figure 2.8
9
300 (0) 150
225
2T25-10
150
150
20
Table 2.4
Bar
Commentary on bar arrangement

Notes
Tension bars are stopped 50 mm from column face to avoid clashing with the column bars
Nominal cover = 20 + 12 = 32 > 25 mm
+
(fl
E
marks
1
......................
/
OK
4.1.3.3(5)
Remaining tension bars stopped off at LH end as shown in Figure 2.6. Bars extended at RH end to provide compression reinforcement (lap = and continuity for internal ties (lap = 1000 mm)
BS 8110
5.2.1.1
Check minimum distance between bars

(7j
>:
bar size or 20 mm
(300 - 32 x 2 - 4 x 25)/3 = 45
> 25
mm
....................
OK
Not used
4
L()
Similar to bar mark
5,10
Loose U bars are fixed inside the column bars and provide continuity for column and internal ties
E ...
?-1
Top legs project from centre line into span, minimum dimensions shown in Figure 2.6
Bottom legs are lapped 1000 mm to provide continuity for internal ties
5 Top legs
= 1800 mm
Bottom legs = 200 + 1000 = 1200
mm
Use r = 50 for both bends
Note that the bottom legs are raised to avoid gap between bars being < 25 mm
10 Top legs E
.-.
5.4.2.1.3
BS 8110
5.2.1.1
= 1500 mm
E
Bottom legs = 200 + 1000 = 1200 mm

6,9 2T16 provided as link hangers are stopped 50 mm from column face
((DD
7,8
Tension bars over the support are stopped as in Figure 2.6. Bars mark 8 are located outside the web
11
Links are arranged in accordance with Figure 2.7 for shear. Links also provide transverse reinforcement with a spacing _s 150 mm at all laps
5.4.2.1.2(2)
,.,
5.2.4.1.2(2)
2.5 Edge beam (interior span)

2.5.1 Cover
for durability and fire resistance

NAD
Nominal cover for exposure class 2b (external) is 35 mm.

Nominal cover for
1
Table 6
BS 8110 Table 3.5
Use 40 mm nominal cover to links
2.5.2 Loading
Permanent load from slab = 4.7 x 5 x 1.25 = 29.4 kN
(assuming 1.25 m strip to be loading on edge beam)

Self-weight of beam = (0.35
0.175)
0.3
x 5 x 24 =
6.3 kN
Cladding load
@ 5
kN/m = 5 x 5 = 25 kN
Characteristic permanent load = 60.7 kN

Characteristic imposed load = 4 x 5 x 1.25 = 25 kN
Total design load = 1.35
x 60.7 +
1.5
x 25 =
119.5 kN
2.5.3 Design moments and shears

These are taken from the Concise Eurocode, Appendix, Table A.1 (5).
2.5.3.1
Interior support
Moment=0.10x
Shear
119.5
x 5 = 59.8 kNm
= 0.55 x 119.5 = 65.7 kN
2.5.3.2 Mid-span
Moment = 0.07 x 119.5 x 5 = 41.8 kNm

2.5.4.1
Interior support
Assume effective depth = 280 mm M
Ck
59.8 x 106
2802
bd 2f
Asyk
x 300 x 32
= 0.079
bdyk
x/d
As
= =
0.189
< 0.45
................................
OK
2.5.3.4.2(5)
579 mm2
Use 2T20 (628 mm2)
2.5.4.2 Mid-span
Assume effective depth = 290 mm
E
Effective flange width = 300 +
+
0.1
x 0.7 x 5000
650 mm
E E
2.5.2.2.1
bd2fCk
Asfyk
yeti
41.8
106
650 x 2902 x 32
= 0.024
bdfck
AS
= 367 mm2
E
Use 2T20 (628 mm2)
The cross-section is shown in Figure 2.9.
650
2T20
350
2T 20
300
I-
Figure 2.9
Edge beam cross-section
2.5.5 Shear reinforcement

Design shear force may be taken to be at distance d into the span from the face of the support. This can be calculated approximately as
=p-0
Z')
4.3.2.2(10)
c()
Vsd
= = =
65.7
119.5 (0.28
+ 0.15)15.0 = 55.4 kN
VRdi
300 x 280 x 0.35 (1.6

58.2 kN
Vsd,
0.28)
x
(
1.2 +
300 x 280)
4.3.2.3(1)
This is greater than
hence only minimum links are required.
4.3.2.2(2)
Assuming grade 250 reinforcement for links, EC2 Table 5.5 gives
Pv,
0.0022
Hence
A 9W
S
0.0022 x 300 = 0.66 mm2/mm
VRd2
200
1.5
CHI
0.5
( 0.7
32) x 32 x 300 x
0.9
x 280
= 435 kN
4.3.2.3(3)
G.)
40 x 628
NIT
CY)
Since
Vsd
(5)
VRd2'
smax
0.8d = 224 mm
Eqn 5.17
200 mm spacing gives
ASW
132 mm2
Use R10 links at 200 mm crs.

E
(ASW
= 2 x 78.5 = 157 mm2)
2.5.6 Deflection
Actual span/effective depth ratio = 5000/290 = 17.2
At mid-span
100 AS 100 x 628
= 0.33%
bd
650 x 290
By interpolation from NAD Table 7, modified for
yk
= 460
Basic span/effective depth ratio = 36
Note: This can be increased allowing for use of a larger than required steel area to
=
Concise Eurocode Figure A.12
36 x 628/367 = 61.6
4.4.3.2(4)
But not greater than 48/1.15 = 41.7
NAD
Inspection shows this to be unnecessary.
Allowable lld > actual l/d
..................................
(p' -O-
Table 7 Note 2
OK
2.5.7 Curtailment of reinforcement

Since the bending moment diagram has not been drawn, simplified curtailment rules are needed. These are given in Section 8 of the Appendix to the Concise Eurocode.
Using the rules, the 20 mm bars in the top may be reduced to 12 mm bars at a distance from the face of support
= =
0.11
(3D
+ 320 + 0.45d
500 + 32 x 20 + 0.45 x 280

x
1266 mm from the column face
33
c-)

23R 10
300
2T12-3
1
b-W
2 11
150
2T20-4
top cover 60 side cover 75
s-
fll
50
2T20-1
3501
2T12-
side cover 75
ELEVATION
Cover to
links -
40
A-A
Figure 2.10
Edge beam reinforcement details
2.6 Columns
2.6.1 Idealization of
structure
in
The simplification assumed for the design of the main beam is shown Figure 2.3.
2.6.2 Analysis
Moments and column loads at each floor are taken from the analysis for the main beam given in Section 2.4.3.
2.6.3 Cover for durability and fire resistance

Nominal cover for interior columns (exposure class
1) is
20 mm.
NAD
Nominal cover for exterior columns (exposure class 2b) is 35 mm. Nominal cover for
E
1
Table 6

E
Use 20 mm (interior) and 40 mm (exterior) nominal cover to links
2.6.4 Internal column

2.6.4.1 Loading and moments at various
floor levels
These are summarized in Table 2.5.
Table 2.5
Loading and moments for internal column

Beam loads (kN) Total Column design loads (kN) Imposed
2
1
Column moments (kNm) Top

2
1
Dead
1
Bottom
2
1
Load case
Roof
2
51
8 6
m m
240 202
238 165
53 43
Self-weight
(f)
187 159 9
(J1
187 159 9 355

CJ)
32
42
96
57
355
30
39
CDo
3rd floor 8 m
6
N,-
283
236
278
143
131 110
126
17
152
126
152
126 9
33
49
Self-weight
337 200
9
642
642
30
55
2nd floor 8 m
6
283
236
278
143
131
126
17
152
126 9
152
126 9
33
49
110
Self-weight
578
1st floor
CA)
(7)
343
126
17
929
154 129 14
929
154 129 14
33
18 29
55
8 6
286 240
280
146
132
111
Self-weight
Foundations 821
486
1226
1226
2.6.4.2 Design for column between first floor and foundation

Effective height in
ktop
N-S
direction
_ (0.5 x 675 x 106 + 675 x 106 ) 5000 3500
(3125 x 106
8000 =
bottom
1N(1)
m m
00)
3125 x 106 )
+ 6000
Eqn 4.60
0.28 but take not less than 0.4

00
Hence a
0.8
CJ)
CJ)
Figure 4.27
Effective height = 0.8 x 5000 = 4000 mm
Load case
gives worst condition (by inspection). = 575 kN
BS 6399:
Imposed load = 0.7 x 821
Part 1, Reduction factor
Dead load = 1226 kN

NSd Msd
=
=
1801 kN
18 kNm (top), 0 (bottom)
PU
1801
x103x1.5-0.94
x 32
x
4.3.5.3.5(2)
3002
15[p- =
Hence
X. min
X
14.5
< 25
25
Ili 0
(loth)
400
300
(Y)
12
46
Note:
10/i
x
E
12
>
25, hence column is slender in
N-S direction
The slenderness in the E-W direction will be found to be approximately the
same.
The structure is braced and non-sway (by inspection), hence the Model Column Method may be used with the column designed as an isolated column.
Xorc
25(2
eo1/eo2)
50 in both E-W and N-S directions
0-0
4.3.5.5.3 Eq n 4.62
Slenderness ratios in both directions are less than Xcr.t, hence it is only necessary to ensure that the column can withstand an end moment of at least
NSdh/20
1801
x 0.3/20 =
(Y)
27.0 kNm
4.3.5.5.3
Eqn 4.64
This exceeds the first order moments.
Hence NSd = 1801 kN and MSd = 27.0 kNm
NSd
0.62
bh ,k
Msd
bh 2f
Assume
27.0
106
= 0.031
ck
3003 x
32
d'
45 mm
E
Then
d'lh
AS
yk
45/300 = 0.15
0.16 (Section 13, Figure 13.2(c))
bh ck
Hence AS
= 1002 mm2
Use 4T20 (1260 mm2)
Note: In the design by Higgins and Rogers, the slenderness ratio exceeds the equivalent of Xcrc but the design moment is still Nh120. EC2 requires less
reinforcement due to the smaller design load and the assumption of a smaller
a1)
cover ratio. If the same cover ratio is used in the Higgins and Rogers design, 4T20 are sufficient in both cases.
2.6.5 External column

2.6.5.1 Loading and moments at various levels
These are summarized in Table 2.6.
Table 2.6
Loading and moments for external column

Beam loads (kN)
Total
Column design loads

(kN)
'L7
Column moments (kNm)

Top
Imposed
2 2
Dead
2
Bottom
E
2 2
Load case
Roof Main Edge Self-weight
184
55
186
55
39
41
145 55
9
145 55 9
209
104
107
39
41
209
93
98
3rd floor Main Edge Self-weight
235
55
240
55
109
c0
114
126
55 9
(f)
126
55 9
399
93
98
148
155
399
93
98
2nd floor Main Edge Self-weight
235
55
240
55
109
114
126
55 9
126
55 9 589
93
98
257
269
589
CIO
103
109
1st floor Main Edge Self-weight

N..
233
55
238
55
108
113
125
55 9
(f)
125
(t)
68
72
55 9
Foundations
365
382
778
778
(D00
2.6.5.2 Design for column between first floor and foundation

675 x 106 x
0.5
ktop
675 x 106
3125 x 106
= 0.71
4000
3500
8000
kbottom
00
Hence
a
0.85
Figure 4.27
Effective height = 0.85
4000 = 3400 mm
E
Slenderness ratio = l/i =
3400
12
= 39.3
300
v will be small so
be less than 25
Hence
xmin
.
25
> 25, therefore column

L()
is
slender in N-S direction
Calculate
Xcrt
e,,,
eo2
bottom moment
top moment
= 0
4.3.5.5.3
85
Hence
Xcrit
25 (2 + 0) = 50
Slenderness ratios in the E-W and N-S directions are both less than 50, hence it is only necessary to ensure that the end moment is at least NW20.
The worst condition occurs with load case 2 at section just above the first floor, where MSd is greatest.
Nsd
589 + 0.8
x 269 = 804 kN
0))
Nh
20
804 x 0.3
20
12.0 kNm
Design end moment = 109 > 12 kNm
Hence
NSd
= 804 kN and MSd = 109 kNm

Maximum spacing of links for internal column Generally Above and below floor
5.4.1.2.2(3)
x 20 = 240 mm 0.67 x 240 = 160 mm

12
NAD
Table 3
5.4.1.2.2(4)
Maximum spacing of links for external column Generally

At lap and below floor
12
x 25
c>)
300 mm
0.67
x 300 = 200 mm

LL.
INTERNAL COLUMN
F2
EXTERNAL
COLUMN
F1
Links
150
Vertical bars
Section
1"1
Links
R8-6
Vertical bars
Section
O
m
350
^
1st.
f
4l
4 4 4
225
- YI
_7 7 o N
200
OOE
300
2()
300
4T20-1
18(0)
o 1
'
o
300
'r
4T25-4
O
_
N F
Edge beam
E 0 b
rn
_
_
4
5
0 0 @
30
Cover to
links=
.--
Fdn'o
g
N T
Fdn.
f
Cover to links
40
2-14R8
300
+f
in
ss c
N
St arters, see Fig. 2.13

,
Figure 2.11
Column reinforcement details
2.7 Foundation
Design typical pad footing for internal column.
2.7.1 Cover
Use 50 mm nominal cover against blinding
4.1.3.3(9)
a nominal cover of not less than 40 mm against blinding. EC2 specifies a minimum cover greater than 40 mm. This implies a nominal cover greater than 45 mm, hence the choice of 50 mm.
BS 8110 specifies
te)
C?.
2.7.2 Loading
Taken from internal column design.
Ultimate design loads:
Dead
= = =
1226
Imposed
Total
575
1801 kN
-.
Hence service loads:
Dead
Imposed
Total
=
=
908
383
1291 kN
The assumption is made that the base takes no moment. Also it is assumed that the dead weight of the base less the weight of soil displaced is 10 kN/m2 over the area of the base.
2.7.3 Size of base

Since, at the time of publication, EC7: Geotechnical design(s) and EC2, Part 3: Concrete foundations0o) have not been finalized, the approach used here is based on current UK practice.
Use 2.75 m x 2.75 m x 0.6 m deep pad
Bearing pressure under service loads

_
1291
+ 10
2.752
181
< 200 kN/m2 .................... OK

=
1801
Design pressure at ultimate limit state
238 kN/m2
E
2.752
2.7.4 Flexural reinforcement

Moment at face of column =
(0)
Q))
238
2.75
1.2252/2
491 kNm
Average effective depth = 600

CAD
50
25 = 525 mm
Msd bd2fck
491
106
= 0.020
2750 x 5252 x 32
AS yk
bd>ck
Hence
AS
0.023
x
E E
2750
525
x
(Y)
32/460 = 2310 mm2
Use 9T20 @ 300 mm crs. each way (2830 mm2)

E
2.7.5 Shear
2.7.5.1 Shear across base
Shear force may be calculated at a critical section distance d from the face of the column.
Design shear
(VSd)
4.3.2.2(10)
238 x 2.75 x
(2.75
0.3)
0.525
= 458 kN
calculating VRd1, the influence of the reinforcement will be ignored since, if straight bars are used, they will not extend d + Ib,net beyond the critical section.
In
(1)
4.3.2.3(1)
VRdl
0.35 x 1.075
1.2
x 2750 x 525/1000
x x
652 kN
Eqn 4.18
VRd,
>
VSd,
hence no requirement for shear reinforcement

c
2.7.5.2 Punching shear

The critical perimeter is shown in Figure 2.12.
Design load on base = 1801 kN

Length of critical perimeter
u
4 x 300 +
7r
(2
1.5
x 525) ] /1000 =
6.15 m
Figure 2.12 Critical perimeter for punching

a))
VRdl
0.35 x 1.075 x 1.2 x 525 x 6.15
((7
1458 kN
4.3.4.5.1
Area within perimeter = 2.98 m2

Design shear
(VSd)
Area of base = 7.56 m2

= 1090 kN
4.3.4.1(5)
_ (7.56
2.98) x 238
VSd
hence no requirement for shear reinforcement C VRdl,
2.7.6 Cracking
Approximate steel stress under quasi-permanent loads
460
1.15
X
(908 + 0.3 x 383)

1801
2310
= 186 N/mm2
2830
From EC2 Table 4.11 bar size should not exceed 25
> 20 mm used.
Hence cracking ...........................................
OK
4.4.2.3 Table 4.11
41

The reinforcement details are shown in Figure 2.13 and given
in
Table 2.7.
c
T
I
9T202
2 3
-300
B2
O
AA
DA
9T20- -300
1
81
PLAN
rCo
I
e-2
2R8-3-300
Fdn.
Cover =40
ACOVER
B1
50,
end =75
Figure 2.13
Base reinforcement details
Table 2.7 Commentary on bar arrangement

Bar marks
1
Notes Straight bars extend full width of base less end cover of 75 mm. Bars should extend an anchorage length beyond the column face
_-0
Anchorage length = 32
-'
x 20 = 640 mm
E
4.1.3.3(9) 5.2.3.4.1
Actual extension = 1150 mm

2
Column starter bars wired to bottom mat Minimum projection above top of base is a compression lap + kicker = 32 x 20
11o
5.2.4.1.3
+ 75 = 715 mm
Links are provided to stabilize and locate the starters during construction
2.8 Shear wall

2.8.1
Structure
The structure is shown in Figure 2.14.
1
st floor
_,
0.5 x wind load on building

4000
250
i
14300
Figure 2.14 Shear wall structure
2.8.2 Loading at foundation level

Dead load from first to third floors and roof
=
Self-weight =
0.5 (3 x 23.5 + 28.5) = 49.5 kN/m
0.175 x 24 x 15.5 = 65.1 kN/m

CJ)
Characteristic dead load =
49.5 + 65.1 = 114.6 kN/m
Characteristic imposed load from slabs

=
2.5 (1.5 + 3
(J1
4)
x 0.7 = 23.6 kN/m

V:
Wind loading is taken as 90% of value obtained from CP3: Ch

Total wind load on building in
Part
201).
N-S direction
= 0.9 x 449 = 404 kN
Wind load on wall = 404/2 = 202 kN
Moment in plane of wall = 202 x 8 = 1616 kNm Hence Maximum force per unit length due to wind moment M x 6
1616
x 6 =
+ 47.4 kN/m
14.22
2.8.3 Vertical design load intensities at ultimate limit state

Dead load + imposed load
=
1.35
Ô,
114.6 + 1.5
x 23.6 =
190.1 kN/m
Dead load + wind load

1.35
114.6 + 1.5
x 47.4 = 225.8 kN/m; or

=
1.0x114.6-1.5x47.4
43.5kN/m
NAD 4(c)
Eqn 2.8(a)
Eqn 2.8(a)
Dead load + wind load + imposed load

= =
1.35x
114.6 + 1.35
x 23.6 1.35 x 47.4
Eq n 2.8(b)
250.6 kN/m or 122.6 kN/m
NAD 4(c)
Therefore maximum design load = 250.6 kN/m
From analysis of slab (not presented), maximum moment perpendicular to plane of wall = 11.65 kNm/m
E E
2.8.4 Slenderness ratio

0.5 4
kA
1
5
3.5
2.05
Eqn 4.60
kB
00
Hence a
10
0.94
01c0l
Figure 4.27
a))
0.94 x 4 = 3.76 m
12
3.76x1000x
175
74.4
Hence wall is slender
2.8.5 Vertical reinforcement

Higgins and Rogers design the shear wall as unreinforced. Plain concrete walls will be covered in EC2 Part 1A which, at the time of publication, has not yet been finalized. The wall will, therefore, be designed here as a reinforced wall. As will be seen, the result is the same.
Eccentricity due to applied loads
eo1
=
=
0
11.65
eo2
x 1000/250.6 = 46.5 mm
Hence
ee
0.6
46.5+0=27.9
mm
Eqn 4.66
Accidental eccentricity
ea
200
3760
2
9.4 mm
Eq n 4.61
Second order eccentricity

e
z
10
L!7
1.15
x 200000
0.9
122
3760z
x 2
460
Kz
Eqns 4.72 &

4.69
51.5K2
1
Assuming K2
Design eccentricity
27.9 + 9.4 + 51.5 = 88.8 mm
Design ultimate load = 250.6 kN/m
Design ultimate moment = 88.8 M

bh2fok
250.6/1000 = 22.3 kNm/m
0.023
N
bhf,k
Asfyk
0.045
0.01
(Section 13; Figure 13.2(d))
bhfck
Hence
As
E
122 mm2/m or 61 mm2/m in each face
Minimum area of reinforcement

= 0.004 x 1000 x 175 = 700 mm2/m 5.4.7.2
This exceeds the calculated value. Hence the minimum governs. Use T12 @ 300 mm crs. in each face (754 mm2/m)
E
E
2.8.6 Shear
Design horizontal shear = 1.5 x 202 = 303 kN
Shear stress = 303 x 1000
(=D
14300 x 175
= 0.12 N/mm2
E
..................
OK
Note:
not calculated since it must be > 0.12bw d by quick inspection of VRdt is EC2 Eqn 4.18.
2.8.7 Horizontal reinforcement

Minimum at 50% of vertical reinforcement provided
As
5.4.7.3
min
188 mm2/m (E F)
Minimum for controlled cracking due to restraint of early thermal contraction
4.4.2.2
45
As
kckf
1.0
t.ettAct/QS
Eqn 4.78
kC
k
ct,eft
= =
0.8
1.9 N/mm2 (assuming
concrete strength to be equivalent to
Table
3.1
C16/20 at time of cracking)

=
as
360 N/mm2 (assuming 10 mm bars)
Table 4.11
AS
= 1.0 x 0.8 x 1.9 x 175 x 1000/360 = 739 mm2/m
Use T10 @ 200 mm crs. in each face (785 mm2/m)
2.8.8 Tie provisions at first floor

According to the NAD, these should follow the rules in BS 8110.
Ft
NAD 65(g)
BS 8110 3.12.3
36 kN
2.8.8.1 Peripheral
tie
=
As
36x103_78mm2
460
Use 1T10 (78.5 mm2)
2.8.8.2 Internal tie force

Force =
2.5 x 36 (4.7 + 4.0) x
7.5
14.3
299 kN
Hence
As
299 x
460
103
= 650 mm2
Use 5T10 in each face (785 mm2)
Hence T10 @ 200 mm crs. horizontal reinforcement below slab is adequate.
2.8.8.3 Wall tie
i-0
in wall 0.5 m
above and
Take the greater of (a) and (b)

(a) Lesser of 2.OFt or
lsF
2.5
= 72 or 48 kN
(b) 3% of total vertical load = 0.03
190.1
= 5.7 kN
Hence
Tie force
48 kN
48 x 103
A
S
= 104 mm2
460
Therefore reinforcement in slab will suffice
2.8.9 Strip footing

EC2, Part 3: Concrete foundations, at the time of publication, has not yet been drafted, hence current UK practice is adopted.
(1)
Maximum pressure due to characteristic dead, imposed and wind loads

=
114.6 + 23.6 + 47.4/0.9
191
kN/m
212 kN/m2
For 900 mm wide strip, pressure
191
0.9
Allow extra 10 kN/m2 for ground floor loads soil in foundations. This gives 222 kN/m2.
and weight
250 > 222
of
concrete displacing
OK
Allowable pressure
1.25
x 200
kN/m2........
Use 900 mm wide strip
Calculate reinforcement for flexure Moment

AS
250.6 x
ion
(0.9
0.175)2
16.5 kNm/m
209 mm2/m
E E
= =
Minimum area
0.0015bd
0.0015
5.4.2.1.1
1000
200 = 300 mm2/m

E
Use T12 @ 300 mm crs. (377 mm2/m)

The reinforcement details are shown in Figure 2.15 and given
in
Table 2.8.
IT-
A
I
1T10-7
II
r 2x1T10-8
T
1T10
bars
links
O N
200
NN
-200
350
ci
19F1)
-N
(48N2 -48F2)
-200 links
96T12-3-300
c O
bars
iJ
i
1st. SFL
wall tie
8
ooz-
M3
L
N
19R8-4 19T10-5
Cr Cr
P P
G
N
(48 N2+48 F2)
96T12-1-300
L
la
19T10-5
-T-
19R8-4
- 1000
%13R10 -9 EW
Fdn.
-71
1
i-
2%4T12-2-300
B2
cover ends
=
=
40 75
A-A
grid
2
omitted for clarity)

WALL ELEVATION
B-B
COVER to
EAST
N1
=
outer bars -
40, F1=
20
Figure 2.15 Shear wall reinforcement details
Table 2.8
Bar marks
E
1
Commentary on bar arrangement

Notes
Wall starters match vertical reinforcement The projection of the horizontal legs beyond the face of the wall form the tension reinforcement in the footing
This extension must be at least a tension anchorage length _
12
x
1.15
460
x 3.2
209
= 208
377
mm
..............
....
OK
5.2.2.2 5.2.2.3
5.2.3.4.1
The minimum projection above the top of the base is a compression lap + 75 mm kicker
=
32 x 12 + 75 = 459 mm
This is detailed at 525 mm

2
..................................
2
OK
Minimum longitudinal reinforcement provided

Minimum horizontal reinforcement provided
4,5,6
5.4.7.3
4.4.2.2
7,8
u')
Peripheral tie at floor

,r.
BS 8110 3.12.3.5
Wall spacers to maintain location of reinforcement
2.9 Staircase
2.9.1 Idealization
The idealization of the staircase is shown
in
Figure 2.16.
3500
5060
Figure 2.16 Idealization of staircase

Design as end span of a continuous beam. Calculations will be given for width.
1
2.9.2 Durability and fire resistance

As for floor slab, Section 2.3, 20 mm nominal cover will be satisfactory.
2.9.3 Loading
Average slab thickness on plan
Self-weight Finishes
=
250 mm
6.0 kN/m 0.5
= 0.25 x 24
= =
Characteristic dead load Characteristic imposed load

Design ultimate load
6.5 kN/m 4.0 kN/m

1.35
6.5 + 1.5
x 4 =
14.78 kN/m
2.9.4 Analysis
Using coefficients in the Concise Eurocode
Moment at interior support

Moment near mid-span
Shear
=
=
0.11
x
x
14.78 14.78
14.78
x 5.062 = 41.6 kNm
0.09
0.6
x x
x
5.062 = 34.1 kNm
Concise Eurocode
Table A.1
5.06
= 44.9 kN

Effective depth
=
175
Interior support,
- 20 103
13.1
6 = 149 mm
41.6
10s
bd2fCk
From Section 13, Table
AS
yk
1492
x 32
= 0.059
bdf
Hence
AS
(L)
0.072
746 mm2/m
E
Use T12 @ 150 mm crs. (754 mm2/m)

E
Span
M bd2ck
Asf ,k
0.048
bd ck
Hence
0.058
A5
601 mm2/m
Use T12 @ 150 mm crs. (754 mm2/m)

L()
2.9.6 Shear
Reinforcement ratio
754
1000 x 149
0.0051
Near support
VRd,
0.35 x (1.6
- 0.175)
x (1.2 + 40 x 0.0051) x 149 = 104.3 kN
4.3.2.3
Eqn 4.18
VRd,
>
Vsd
= 44.9 kN, hence no shear reinforcement required
2.9.7 Deflection
Reinforcement ratio at mid-span =
0.51%
Concrete is lightly stressed, hence basic span/effective depth ratio is 32.

Since
Yk
Table 4.14
= 460, this should be modified to:

= 34.9 4.4.3.2(4)
(+'j
32 x 400/460 x 754/601
Actual span/effective depth ratio =
5060/149 = 34
<
34.9.......
OK
2.9.8 Cracking
As for floor slab in Section 2.3.8

Thickness of waist
E
183 mm2/m
4.4.2.2
175
< 200 mm
4.4.2.3 (1)
No further check is necessary.
2.9.9 Tie provisions

E-W internal
Total
tie,
the minimum area required =

x 3 = 273 mm2
91 mm2/m
(see Section 2.3.9)
BS 8110 3.12.3.2
area for staircase =
91
Provide 2T12 tie bars each side of staircase in adjacent slab
51

0
a
5T10-I11 -300
ST10-16-300
i
750
150
3- 2T10-8
3
6T12-3*6T12-141-125 alternate
3Qrd
16
117-.1
{
I
10T12-12-150
'-1OT12-13-150
7
Cover = 40
10T12-15-150
10 16
-9
6
117
15
LANDING
Cover
I
to
outer
bars
= 20
A-A
2nd
Aa
FLIGHT
A
4 10-2-300 L 1OT12-1-150
Figure 2.17
Staircase reinforcement details
52
3BEAMS
3.1
Introduction
This Section covers the design of beams for shear and torsion, and supplements the examples given in Section 2. The requirements for adequate safety against lateral buckling are also examined.
c O
0 0
3.2 Design methods for shear
the Code.
(1)
Standard
Variable Strut Inclination (VSI).
C C O
C
(2)
The standard method assumes a concrete strut angle of 450 (coto = 1) and that the direct shear in the concrete, V d, is to be taken into account. This contrasts with the VSI method which permits the designer to choose strut angles between the limits set in the NADO), as shown in Figure 3.1, but ignores the direct shear in the concrete.
((]
p30
(D
3.2.1 Introduction
EC20) differs from BS 8110(2) because the truss assumption used in shear design is explicit. Leading on from this, two alternative methods are given in
O C
U U
C O
A further disadvantage of this method is that with increasing values of cote, i.e., reductions in the concrete strut angle, the forces in the tension reinforcement
C_
C -
Figure
O
3.1
Limits of cotA (VSI method)
Because the direct shear in the concrete is not taken into account in the VSI method, no savings in shear reinforcement can be achieved until the applied shear exceeds three times the concrete shear (VSd > 3V d).
O U
O U O O
U C
C O
O U C O
O E U O O O
o U
BEAMS
increase significantly and may well outweigh any notional savings in shear reinforcement. These forces are, it should be noted, explicitly checked in EC2 but not in BS 8110. Given special circumstances the VSI method may be required but for most practical situations, the standard method will provide the most economic design.
COO
CD-
OM
3.2.2 Example
uniformly distributed loading
The beam shown in Figures 3.2 and 3.3 is to be designed for shear.
AO)
Figure 3.2
Figure 3.3 Typical section

The material strengths are
Ultimate load
385 kN/m
6m
Beam span and loading
iii
400
400
example
1000
*FJ
Z
Asl
=
6434mm
2
=
(BT32)
50mm
Cover to links
example
fck
fvWk
30 N/mm2 (concrete strength class C30/37)
250 N/mm2 (characteristic yield strength of links)
The beam will be checked for shear reinforcement at three locations using both the standard and VSI methods for comparison. These are
(1)
4.3.2.4.3 4.3.2.4.4
4.3.2.2(10) 4.3.2.2(2)
d from support
Where Vsd = VRd, i.e., the point beyond which only minimum shear reinforcement is required
'
(2)
(3)
An intermediate point between
and 2.
4.3.2.4.3
3.2.2.1 Standard method

The shear force diagram is shown in Figure 3.4.
V Sd
1155 k N
VRdl
a
I
1155 kN
Figure 3.4 Shear force diagram
-example
BEAMS
The design shear resistance of the section,

=
=
VRd1,
is given by
4.3.2.3(1)
Eq n 4.18
VRd1
T IT
I TRdk
(1.2 + 40pl) + 0.15acp ] bwd
Rd
0.34 N/mm2 for

1.6
fok
=
1
30 N/mm2
Table 4.8
d 4
As,
P,
6434
400 x 900
0.018
I>
0.02
bwd
(assuming BT32 throughout span)

NSd
AC
VRd1
0.34 x
(1.2 + 40
x 0.018) x 400 x 900 = 235 kN
3.2.2.1.1 Position
VSd
at d from support
1155
VRd1'
0.9
x 385
808.5 kN
4.3.2.4.3
VSd
>
shear reinforcement is required
The shear resistance of a section with shear reinforcement is given by

VRd3
Vcd
V
=
Eq n 4.22
V V
= =
VRd1
235 kN
Eq n 4.23
A sw
s
(0.9d)fywd
where
A sw
area
of
shear reinforcement
of
spacing
250/1.15
For
VRd3
70C
shear reinforcement
217.4 N/mm2 E E
>
?
Al
VSd
Vwd
VSd
Vcd; or
A
(0.90) ywd
Sw
VSd
Vd
Therefore
3.25 mm2/mm
E
(Nn
Asw
S
(808.5
235) x 103
0.9 x 900 x 217.4
Try R12 links @ 140 mm crs. (4 legs), Asw/s

E
3.23 mm2/mm
E
E E
55
BEAMS
Check crushing of compression struts

VRd2
(2 )Pf
bw0.9d(1
+ cots)
Eqn 4.25
For vertical links, cot

0.7
=
ck
0.55
200 =
20 N/mm2
0.5
Eqn 4.21
30
cd 1.5
Therefore
VRd2
= =
(2)x0.55x20x400x0.9x900x1
1782 kN
>
Vsd, max
1155 kN
................
OK
4.4.2.3
Check maximum spacing of links

ASw
452
140
Pw
sbwsin a
x 400
103
0.0081
Eqn 4.79
Vsd
3V
(808.5
x 235) x
CY)
pwbwd
0.0081
x 400 x 900
= 300 mm
35 N/mm2
Table 4.13
Maximum spacing for crack control

Since (5)
Smax VRd2
<
VSd
:5
(3)
VRd2
5.4.2.2(7)
Eqn 5.18
0.6d > 300 mm
140 mm spacing
..........................................
Pw
OK
Check minimum value of
Table 5.5
Concrete strength class C30/37

Steel class S250
By interpolation from EC2 Table 5.5

Pw,mm
0.0022
<
E
0.0081 proposed
Use R12 links @ 140 mm crs. (4 legs)
Note: Using the standard method, the increase in force in the tension reinforcement is best covered by using the shift rule.
It will, however, be calculated in this example to provide a comparison with the values obtained in the subsequent examples using the VSI method.
((1
Force in tension reinforcement

Td
2) VSd(Cote
Cota)
G.)
MS
'-h
O-in
4.3.2.1P(6) 5.4.2.1.3
C.-
Eqn 4.30
BEAMS
Msd
Vsd
= =
=
Td
884 kNm,
808.5 kN
1,
LC)
0.9d
810 mm
cotO Therefore
3.2.2.1.2 Position 2
cota
1091
0 for vertical links
4.3.2.4.3(5)
+ 404 =
=
1495 kN
= =
where
Vsd
VRdl
235 kN
From Figure 3.4

Vsd
1155
((0
a x 385
2.39 m from support

VRd2
From Section 3.2.2.1.1,
LC)
235 kN
>
E
Vsd, max
...........
......
OK
The amount of shear reinforcement provided should be greater than

Pw,min
Re-arranging EC2 Eqn 5.16 in terms of

E
For vertical links sins
Hence A aw
s
Maximum longitudinal spacing

Vsd
VRd2
Since
Vsd
Smax
This is a point intermediate between the section at dfrom support and the point at which shear reinforcement is no longer required.
E
aro)
Pwmin
Table 5.5
A
Pwbwsina
S
Asw

E
Vsd
VRdl
0.0022
A 5w
s
gives
0.0022 x 400 x
0.88 mm2/mm
E E
(smax)
is given by EC2 Eqns 5.17-5.19.
= =
235 kN
1782 kN from Section 3.2.2.1.1
(5)
CC)
VRd2'
EC2 Eqn 5.17 applies
U')
0.8d > 300 mm

0.88
Eqn 5.17
264 mm2,
4R10
x 300 =
= 314 mm2
E
at 1.65 m from support

E
= =
1155
1.65
x 385 =
LC)
520 kN
235 kN
BEAMS
Since
VSd
>
VRdt'
shear reinforcement is required
Re-arranging EC2 Eqn 4.23

ASw
VSd
Vd
(520
0.9
235) x 103
217.4
0.9df M,d
x 900 x
=
1.81
1.62 mm 2 /mm
Try R12 links @ 250 mm crs. (4 legs)
mm2/mm
E

A SW
Pw
4.4.2.3
Eqn 4.79
sb w sina
For vertical links sina
Hence
_
Pw
452
250 x 400 =
0.0045
Vgd
3V d
(520
x 235) x
103
pwbwd
0.0045 x 400 x 900
-114 N/mm 2
Maximum spacing for crack control = 300 mm

E
..................
OK
Table 4.13
Since
(5)VRd2
<
=
VSd
(3)VRd2
5.4.2.2(7)
Eqn 5.18
0.6d P 300 mm
smax
From Section 3.2.2.1.1

VRd2
>
VSd,max
.......................................
E
OK
Provide R12 links @ 250 mm crs (4 legs)

To
optimize link spacing, check the point at which shear reinforcement is satisfied by R12 @ 200 mm crs. (4 legs).
ASw
S
452 200
2.26 mm2/mm
A SW wd
=
s
(0.9d)fywd
= 2.26 x 0.9 x 900 x 217.4 = 398 kN
VRd3
Vd +
Vwd
Equating
VRd3
VSd
and noting that + V ,d + =
Vd
VRdl
VSd
VRdl
235 + 398
= 633 kN
BEAMS
Distance of point from support
1155
(Y)
385
633
1.36 m
The proposed link arrangement is shown in Figure 3.5.
R12-140
4 legs
R12-200
4
R12-300
4 legs
R12-200
4 legs
R12-140
4 legs
legs
1-36m
-2.39
6.Om between centres of supports
2-39m+
Figure 3.5 Link arrangement (standard method)

Note:
example
the centre portion of the beam R10 links are required by calculations but R12 (') are shown to avoid the possible misplacement on site. Distance from the support (+) could be reduced to 1.70 m in this case.
In
r-1.
3.2.2.2 Variable strut inclination method

This method allows the angle of the concrete compression strut to be varied at the designer's discretion within limits stated in the Code.
can give some economy in shear reinforcement but will require the provision of additional tension reinforcement. In most cases the standard method will
It
suffice.
This reduced shear reinforcement will only be obtained at high levels of design shear and is counter-balanced by increased tension reinforcement. This can be seen by a comparison of EC2 Eqns 4.22 and 4.23 in the standard method and EC2 Eqn 4.27 in the variable strut inclination method.
The standard method gives
VRd3
((DD
CLL.
4.3.2.4.4
O-N-0
>"O
d
Vd
A Sw
+ twd
(0.9d)ywd
Eqn 4.22 Eqn 4.23
Re-arranging gives
Asw
VRd3
Vd
(0.9d)ywd
The VSI method gives

A sw
VRd3
(0.90)fywd Cot()
Eqn 4.27
Re-arranging gives A sw
S
VRd3
(0.9d)ywd cot()
BEAMS
Note:
the above equation the contribution of the concrete, resistance of the section is not taken into account.
In
d,
to the shear
With cot6 = 1.5 which is the maximum value permitted in the NAD, reductions in shear reinforcement will only occur when
VRd3
VRd3
Vcd Or
(0.9d) fyWd x 1.5

G
1.5(VRd3
(0.9d) f,N,d
VRd3
Vd)
Vsd
Putting
If
Vsd
Vsd
VRd3
gives
>
3V
>
3V
reinforcement.
If
d,
then the VSI method will allow a reduction in shear

of of
this inequality is not satisfied, use produce an uneconomic amount standard method should be used.
the variable strut inclination method will shear reinforcement. In this case the
VRd2
DLO
For elements with vertical shear reinforcement,

bWzv
is given by
cd
Putting
Vsd
VRd2
VRd2
cote + tan6
and re-arranging gives
1
Eqn 4.26
Vsd
bWzv
cd
cotO + tan6
Figure 3.1 shows cotO plotted against 1/(cot6 + tan6) together with the EC2 and NAD limits for cot6. Hence for a given Vsd, the limits for cotO can be found.
Increasing the value of cotO will reduce the shear reinforcement required but increase the force in the tension reinforcement.
In this example, cotO will be chosen to minimize the shear reinforcement.
(OD
-'O
3.2.2.2.1 Position
From above
V11
1
7-O
z
P
at d from support
bWzvfcd
cotO + tan6
= =
bW
400 mm
0.9
x 900
810 mm
0.7
fck
0.55 K 0.5
Eq n 4.21
200
BEAMS
30
cd
20 N/mm2
1.5
Vsd
808.5 kN
Therefore
1
808.5 x 103
cotO + tanO
400 x 810 x 0.55 x 20

x
x
From Figure 3.1, this lies under the curve. Therefore, cotO = 1.5 can be chosen which is the maximum value allowed under the NAD limits.
!z?
Coo
0.22
V Rd3
(A s
VRd3
) Z ywdCOte
Eqn 4.27
Now equating
Asw
to
Vsd
and re-arranging
808.5
810
Vsd
103
zywdcotO
x 217.4 x
=
1.5
3.06 mm2/mm
E
Check
Asw ywd
1.66
< ('z)ofcd
E
5.5
.........................
=
3.01 mm2/mm
Try R12 links @ 150 mm crs. (4 legs), Asw/s
Check maximum spacing of links.
SIN
OK
4.4.2.3
pw
A sw
0.0075
Eqn 4.79
sbW sin
(808.5
V- 3V
sd
cd
x 235) x
(NA)
103
pw
bwd
0.0075 x 400 x 900
38.3 N/mm2

pw
= =
300 mm
E
Table 4.13
OK
=
smax
0.0075
>
pw.min
0.0022
...................
Table 5.5
5.4.2.2(7)
Check
Vsd
808.5 kN
bwzv
cd
400 x 810 x 0.55 x 20

2.167
VRd2
1644 kN
cotO + tanO
+
Since (5) VRd2

smax
VSd
(3) VRd2
Eqn 5.18
0.6d
D 300 mm
BEAMS
Check additional force in tension reinforcement.

Msd
Td
+
Td
2)
=
VSd(cote
cot) =
1091 + 606
= 1697 kN
Eqn 4.30
c..
This compares with
1495 kN using the standard method.

E
Note: Although not permitted by the NAD, values of cote up to 2.5 are given in EC2.
check on shear reinforcement using cotO = 2.5 is now given to illustrate the effect of increasing values of 0 on shear and tension reinforcement.
A
ASW
Vsd
810
808.5 x 103
z ywd tote
217.4
x 2.5
1.84 mm2/mm
Try R12 @ 225 mm crs. (4 legs), A,Wls
= 2.01 mm2/mm

pw
0.005
Vsd
3 d pwbwd
57.5 N/mm2

Smax
250 mm
E
................
OK OK
Table 4.13
Eqn 5.18
0.6d
> 300 mm
.............................
Check additional force in tension reinforcement.

+ (2)Vsd (tote
Td
CEO
Td
Msd
cot) = 1091 +
1011
= 2102 kN
This compares with
1495 kN using the standard method.
where
(D3
Vsd
VRd1
Since only minimum shear reinforcement is required this case is identical to that shown in Section 3.2.2.1.2.
E
Vsd
at 1.65 m from support
520 kN
VSd
AiW
S
520 x
810
103
zywdCoto
217.4
x
=
=
1.5
1.96 mm2/mm
Try R12 links @ 225 mm crs. (4 legs), ASW/s
2.01 mm2/mm
BEAMS
From Section 3.2.2.2.1 spacing is satisfactory.
As in Section 3.2.2.1.3, check the point at which the shear requirement is satisfied by R12 @ 200 mm crs. (4 legs).
E
SW
452
2.26 mm2/mm
s
(
200
Ssw
J
VRd3
zfyWd
cot6 = 2.26 x 810 x

1155
217.4
1.5 =
597 kN
Eq n 4.27
Distance from support
597
1.45 m
385 The proposed link arrangement is shown in Figure 3.6.
R12-150
4 legs
R12-200
4 legs
300_
4 legs
R12-200
4 legs
R12-1SO
4 legs
1.45m
2-39m
6.Om between centres of supports
2.
39m
Figure 3.6
Link arrangement (VSI method)
example
Comparing this with the arrangement in Figure 3.5 obtained using the standard method, it can be seen that less reinforcement is required near the support but this needs to be carried further along the beam. There is little overall saving in this case.
5
3.3 Shear resistance with concentrated loads close to
support
3.3.1
Introduction
Where concentrated loads are located within 2.5d of a support, the value TRd may be modified by a factor a when calculating VRd1. This enhancement only applies when the section is resisting concentrated loads and the standard method is used. For a uniformly distributed load, an unmodified value of VRdt should be used.
-T
4.3.2.2(9)
3.3.2 Example 2
concentrated loads only
The beam shown in Figures 3.7 and 3.8 is to be designed for shear.
BEAMS
800 k N
800 kN
Ultimate loads
1.35rr
1.4
I
1-35m
6m
Figure 3.7 Beam span and loading
example 2
900
1000
A sl =
4825mm
(6T321
50mm
Cover to links
Figure 3.8 Typical section
example 2
The materials strengths are

fck
fVwk
30 N/mm2 (concrete strength grade, C30/37)

250 N/mm2 (characteristic yield strength of links)
the example, VRd, will be calculated at positions between the support and 2.5d away at intervals of 0.5d. This is done to illustrate the effect even though the critical section will normally be at the position of the concentrated load.
In
((DD
3.3.2.1 Shear reinforcement
The shear force diagram is shown in Figure 3.9.
example 2
BEAMS
The basic design shear resistance of the section,

VRd,
VRdi,
is given by
4.3.2.3(1)
[TRd
k (1.2 + 40pl) + 0.15 acp]b,,d

= 30 N/mm2
Eqn 4.18
Table 4.8
a-0
TRd
0.34 N/mm2 for Ck
For concentrated loads within 2.5d of the face of the support, an enhancement of shear resistance is permitted. -r Rd may be multiplied by a factor a when T
E
determining
a
Taking values of x between 0.5d and 2.5d gives values of Table 3.1.
Table 3.1
No enhancement taken, see Figure 3.9
The equation for VRdl can be modified to give a range of values corresponding to the distance from the support.
VRdl(X)
Pt
cp
Values of design shear resistance, Table 3.2

x
(m)
(r)
VRd,.
2.5d/x with 1.0
<_
<_
5.0
07-Rd
Eqn 4.17
shown
in
Design shear strength

X
OTRd
(m)
(N/mm
1.7
OTRd
0.45 0.90 1.35 1.80 2.25
2.5 1.67 1.00* 1.00*
0.85 0.57 0.34 0.34
[8TRdk (1.2
1.6 Asr
+ 40pl) +
1
Eqn 4.18 (mod)
-9
4825
400 x 900
(Y)
0.013
bW d
AC
VRd,,
VRdl
are given
in Table 3.2.
Design shear resistance

VRdl
(kN) 1052
0.45 0.90
1.35 1.80
526 353
211 211
2.25
BEAMS
Shear reinforcement is required when

From Figure 3.9,
E
Vsd
VSd
>
VRd1'
4.3.2.4
= 800 kN from x = 0 to x = 1.35 m
Using the standard method

VRd3
4.3.2.4.3
= =
Vd
Vwd
Eqn 4.22
Putting
VSd
VRd3
Vsd
and
Vd
d
VRdl
gives
VRdl
Values of design shear resistance to be provided by shear reinforcement, are given in Table 3.3.
Table 3.3
`/)
V d,
Design shear resistance V

VRdl
VSd
VSd
VRdl
V
0
(kN)
1052
(kN)
800
(kN)
<
526 353
211
CJ)
800 800
0
274 447
211
Therefore maximum shear reinforcement is required when i.e., when x = 1.35 m.
This should be provided over the entire length from x = 0 to x = 2.25 m (0 < x < 2.5d).
l(7
< <
0 0
VRdl
353 kN, 4.3.2.2(9)
Note:
4.3.2.2(9)
positioned close to a support, it is possible that using a to modify VRdl may lead to only minimum shear reinforcement being provided throughout the beam. In this case, the designer may wish to base the shear resistance on the unmodified VRd1.
If
This can be illustrated by taking the example above but placing the point load at 0.5d from the support.
The modified shear force diagram is shown in Figure 3.10.
VRd1
Fn,
(mod)
VSd
1052kN
800 k
N
X300
a concentrated load
is
((DD
Figure 3.10 Shear force diagram (load at 0.5d)
Note
)3
of concentrated
on span side load
VRd1= 211kN f-1
X/d
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.5
Position of
concentrated load
example 2 modified
BEAMS
In this case it
111
VRdl
x =
211 kN,
0tox
would be prudent to check the shear resistance on the unmodified The required shear reinforcement should be provided from = 0.5d
in
Check area of shear reinforcement required

Re-arranging the equation for
A sw
V d
example 2.
Eqn 4.23
gives
447 x 103
Vd
0.9d ywd
0.9
x 900 x
=
217.4
2.54 mm2/mm
Try R12 links @ 175 mm crs. (4 legs), Aswls
= 2.58 mm2/mm
E
E
Check crushing of compression strut

SIN
VRd2
bw0.9d (1 ( 2 ) P cd
= 0
+ Iota)
Eqn 4.25
For vertical links, cota
0.7
k
200
0.55
Eqn 4.21
30
cd
20 N/mm2
1.5
Therefore
VRd2
= =
(2)x0.55x20x400x0.9x900x1
1782 kN
(?,
>
Vsd
800 kN
....................
OK
4.4.2.3
Check maximum spacing of links.

A sw
Pw
sbw sina
=
1
Eq n 4.79
For vertical links sina
Pw 175 x 400
Pwmin
0.0022
452
0.0064 >
.......
OK
Table 5.5
Vsd
3V d
_
(800
x 353) x
103
<
pwbwd
0.0064 x 400 x 900
300 mm
Table 4.13
5.4.2.2(7)
By inspection, EC2 Clause 5.4.2.2(7) is satisfied.
Use R12 links @ 175 mm crs. (4 legs) for 0 < x < 2.25 m
BEAMS
3.3.3 Example 3
combined loading
in
The revised loading and shear force diagrams are shown 3.12 respectively.
Figures
3.11
and
Ultimate loads
800 kN
I
800 kN
v-
100
kN/m
H
Pa
1-3sm
1.35m
6m
Figure
3.11
Beam span and loading
example 3

^(n
example 3
E
The basic design shear resistance of the section, VRdl' is given by

VRdl
4.3.2.3(1)
TRdk(1.2
40pt) + 0.15vcP ] bwd
Eqn 4.18
4.3.2.2(9)
For concentrated loads within 2.5d of the face of the support, -T may be T Rd increased as in Section 3.3.2. However, no similar enhancement is permitted for uniformly distributed loads.
a must be reduced depending on the proportion of concentrated loads to total design load. 0 can then be written as
ared
+ (a
1)
Vsd(conc)
VSd(tot)
With 1.0
_<
5.0
Vsd(cono)
= =
design shear force due to concentrated loads design shear force due to total loads
VSd(tot)
Values of the concentrated load ratio and the resulting design shear strength are given in Tables 3.4 and 3.5.
BEAMS
Table 3.4 Concentrated load ratio

x
(m)
VSd(conc)
Vsd(conc)/Vsd(tot)
VSd(tot)
VSd(udl)
(kN)
(kN)
(kN)
Sd(conc)
/Vsd(toq
0.45 0.90
1.35
800 800
800
0
255 210
165
120
1055
1010
965
120
0.76
0.79
0.83
1.80
2.25
75
75
Table 3.5 Design shear strength

x
(m)
aredTRd
NredTRd
red
(N/m
0.45 0.90
1.35 1.80
4.04 2.19
1.56 1.00
1.37
0.75,
2.5
1.67 1.0
1.0
0.53
0.34
2.25
1.00
0.34
The equation for VRd1 can be modified to give a range of values corresponding to the distance from the support.
VRd1
(x)
1aredTRdk(1.2
+ 40pi) + 0.15
acP
I bWof
Eqn 4.18 (mod)
As in Section 3.3.2.1
k
=
1,
p,
0.013,
aop
Values of design shear resistance, VRd1' and design shear resistance to be provided by shear reinforcement, V d, are given in Tables 3.6 and 3.7.
Table 3.6 Design shear resistance (VRd)
x
(m)
VRdl
(OD
(kN)
0.45 0.90
1.35 1.80
848 464
328
211
2.25
211
Table 3.7
VRd1
Design shear resistance

VSd
w)
VSd
VRd1
Vwd
(M)
848 464 328
211
(M)
1055 1010 965
120
(kN) 207
546
637
<
211
75
<'O
BEAMS
Therefore maximum shear reinforcement is required when

VRd,
328 kN, i.e., when x
1.35 m
This should be provided from x
0 to x =
2.25 m (0 < x < 2.5d)

A
Check area of shear reinforcement required.

Re-arranging the equation for
ASw
S
V d
Eqn 4.23
wd
(0.9d)f wd
0.9
637
103
x 900 x 217.4
=
3.61 mm2/mm
Try R12 links @ 125 mm crs. (4 legs), ASW/s
3.62 mm2/mm
Check crushing of compression strut

From example 2,
VRd2
1782 kN
>
Vsd
1100 kN
..........
OK

By comparison with example 2, requirements are satisfied
4.4.2.3
.........
m
OK
5.4.2.2(7)
Use R12 links @ 125 mm crs. (4 legs) for 0
< x < 2.25
For the remainder of the beam beyond x = 2.5d (2.25 m) provide minimum reinforcement as example given in Section 3.2.2.
3.4 Design method for torsion

3.4.1
Introduction
The edge beam shown in Figure 3.13 carries the ends of simply supported floor slabs seated on the lower flange. The beam is fully restrained at its ends.
The example chosen is the same as that used in Allen's Reinforced concrete design to BS 8110: Simply explained(12).
Analysis of the structure and the design of the section for flexure is not included. The section will be checked for shear, torsion and the combination of both.
BEAMS
Figure 3.13
Beam section
3.4.2 Design data

Design torsional moment (Tsd)
Design shear (Vsd)
= =
120 kNm
355 kN
Concrete strength grade is C30/37,

Nominal cover to links is 35 mm.
Ck
30 N/mm2
Assuming 25 mm bars and 10 mm links

.E-
4.1.3.3 NAD
Table 6
=
1441.5 say 1440 mm
1500
35
10
25
2
Assume 0.25% tensile reinforcement for flexure
3.4.3 Shear resistance

Shear
will
be taken as acting on the web of the section only.
When combined shear and torsion effects are to be considered, shear is to be checked using the variable strut inclination method. The angle 9 of the equivalent concrete struts is to be the same for both torsion and shear design. The design shear resistance,
VRdl
VRd1,
4.3.3.2.2(4)
4.3.2.3(1)
with zero axial load is given by
=
= =
7-
Rdk(1.2
+ 40pl)bwd
ick
Eqn 4.18
=
TRd
0.34 N/mm2 for

1.6
30 N/mm2
E
Table 4.8
d =
1.6
1.44 = 0.16 X1.0
OWED
C')
3.1.2.4 Table 3.1
.0)
BEAMS
Assuming 0.25% tensile reinforcement, pi
0.0025 > 0.02
VRdl
0.34 x 1(1.2 + 40 x 0.0025) x 250 x 1440 x 10-3
= 159.1 kN < 355 kN

Therefore shear reinforcement required.
;;z
Use the variable strut inclination method. The maximum design shear force, to avoid web crushing is given by VRd2'
bWzu
VRd2
cd
4.3.2.4.4(2)
(cot6 + tang)
Eqn 4.26
Re-arranging gives
VRd2
1
bwzu cd
cot6 + tan6
= 355 kN
Vsd
bW
z
=
=
250 mm
0.9d
E
0.9
x 1440 =
0.7
1296 mm
0.7
k =
200 30
1.5
200
30 =
0.55
-9 0.5
4.3.2.4.2(3)
ca
k
-/C
20 N/mm2
Therefore 355 x 103 250 x 1296 x 0.55 x 20

=
0.1
VSd
bzu od
W
1
cot6 + tan6
should be
>_
0.1
By reference to Figure 3.1, it will be seen that the value of cot6 may be taken anywhere between the limits of 0.67 to 1.5.
CD
NAD Table 3
4.3.2.4.4(1)
To minimize link reinforcement, take
cot6
1.5
Design shear resistance,
VRd3'
for shear reinforcement is given by

E
VRd3
IA- I
ZYwdcote
4.3.2.4.4(2)
Eqn 4.27
BEAMS
Re-arranging gives
A SW
s
VRd3
Zfywdcote
VRd3
Putting
ASW
equal to
Vsd
Vsd
Zfywdcote
Using high yield reinforcement
ywd
YwK
ys
460
1.15
400 N/mm2
E E
Therefore
Sw
=
0.9
355 x
103
=
1.5
x 1440 x 400 x
0.46 mm2lmm
ASWfywd
= 0.46 x
400 = 0.74 < "

250
Ed
= 0.55 x 20 = 5.5 N/mm2.. OK

2
bw s
4.3.2.4.4(2) Eqn 4.27
Before choosing the reinforcement, the effects of torsion will be considered and the results combined.
The force in the longitudinal reinforcement,

NIA
Td
(
Td,
ignoring flexure, is given by

4.3.2.4.4(5)
2) Vsd(cotO
=
1.5
For vertical links, cot

Td
SIN
Iota)
Eq n 4.30
355
2
266.3 kN
Additional area of longitudinal reinforcement

Td
266.3 x 103
400
666 mm 2
ywd
This area of reinforcement must be combined with the tension reinforcement required for flexure together with the longitudinal reinforcement required for torsion.
3.4.4 Torsional resistance

Torsional resistance is calculated on the basis of a thin-walled closed section. Solid sections are replaced by an idealized equivalent thin-walled section. Sections of complex shape are divided into sub-sections with each sub-section treated as an equivalent thin-walled section. The torsional resistance is taken
.'
C,)
(1)
as the sum
V'.
of
the torsional resistances of the sub-sections.

X17
The torsional moment, carried by each sub-section according to elastic theory, may be found on the basis of the St Venant torsional stiffness. Division of the section into sub-sections should be so arranged as to maximize the calculated stiffness.
BEAMS
For this example the section will be divided into the sub-sections shown in
Figure 3.14.
310
200
I>
250
1500
200
x
310
Figure 3.14
Dimensions of sub-sections
3.4.4.1 St Venant
torsional stiffnesses
ah3minhmax
BS 8110:
Part 2
3.4.4.1.1 Top and bottom
hmax
flanges
(gy
2.4.3 Eq n
hmax
h min
.
310
310 mm,
hmin
200 mm
1.55
200
=
From which R
0.203
BS 8110:
Therefore
J
3.4.4.1.2 Web
hmax
0.203 x 2003 x 310
0.5
109 mm4
Part 2 2.4.3 Table 2.2
1500 mm,
1500
hmin
250 mm
E
h max
hmin
250
(3
From which
0.33
Therefore
BS 8110: Part 2 2.4.3

7.7
0.33
x 2503 x 1500 =
109 mm4
Table 2.2
BEAMS
3.4.4.1.3 Total stiffness

`Jtot
[(2 x 0.5) + 7.7] x 109
8.7x
109mm4
3.4.4.2 Thicknesses
of equivalent thin-walled sections

the actual wall thickness
4.3.3.1(6)
t
where
u
A
'4
u
>5
=
=
outer circumference of the section

total area within the outer circumference
3.4.4.2.1 Top and bottom flanges
=
=
(310 + 200)2
1020 mm 62 x 103 mm2
A Therefore
t
310 x 200
62x103
1020
x
61
mm
4.3.3.1(6)
t may not be less than twice the cover, c, to the longitudinal bars. Hence, with 10 mm links
tmin
E E
2(35 + 10)
90 mm
3.4.4.2.2
Web
u
(1500 + 250)2
1500
3500 mm
375 x 103 mm2
x 250 =
Therefore
375 x 103
t
3500
Values of t between the limits of A/u and 2c may be chosen provided that the design torsional moment, Tsd, does not exceed the torsional moment that can be resisted by the concrete compression struts.
3.4.4.3 Torsional moments
Tsd,tot
120 kN m
This total moment is shared between the flanges and web in proportion to their torsional stiffness.
Therefore
TsdJI
CA)
107 mm
> 2c
..................
OK
120
x 0'5 =
8.7
6.9 kNm
Tsd,w
120
x
8.7
106 kNm
Tsd
must satisfy the following two conditions

Tsd
<_
4.3.3.1(5)
TRdt
and
<_
TRd2
Eqn 4.38
Eqn 4.39
Mart
BEAMS
3.4.4.4 Torsion in flanges
20cd0k
TRdl
cotO + tan6
4.3.3.1(6) Eq n 4.40
Re-arranging gives
TRdl
1
20cdtAk
cotO + tan6
equal to
TSd
Putting
TRdl
TSd
2v cdtAk
cotO + tang
0.7
0.7
- ck
4.3.3.1(6)
200)
Eqn 4.41
0.7 (0.7
200)
0.385
0.35
fcd
20 N/mm2 90 mm area enclosed within the centre line of the thin-wall section
(310
= =
=
Ak
Therefore
TSd
20cdtAk
By reference to Figure 3.1 it may be seen that the value of cotO may be taken anywhere between the limits of 0.67 to 1.5.
To minimize link reinforcement take cotO
= 1.5. Note that this value must be consistent with the value taken for normal shear.
A sw
S
TRd2
Re-arranging gives
Asw
TRd2
+-r
90)
x (200
90)
24.2 x 103 mm2
6.9
x
x
106
103
x 0.385 x 20 x 90 x 24.2 x
x
0.206
NAD
Table 3
4.3.3.1(6)
2Ak(ywd
Cote)
4.3.3.1(7)
Eqn 4.43
2AktywdCote
BEAMS
Putting
ASW
TRd2
equal to
Tsd
Tsd
2AkyWdCot6
Using mild steel reinforcement
fywd
Therefore
ASW
f,,",,k
250
1.15
217 N/mm2
6.9
106
x 24.2 x
103
=
1.5
0.44 mm2/mm
x 217 x
The spacing of torsion links should not exceed
k
U
5.4.2.3(3)
where
Uk
=
=
the circumference of the area Ak

2[(310
4.3.3.1(7)
90) + (200
90)]
660 mm
Therefore
660
Smax
3()
82.5 mm, say 80 mm
ASW
0.44
x 80 =
35.2 mm2
E
Use R8 links at 80 mm crs.
The additional area of longitudinal steel for torsion is given by

U (TRd2
)Cote
Ak
TRd2
Eq n 4.44
Re-arranging and putting

Uk
equal to
Tsd
( Tsd 2U
SI
ote
y1d
Using high yield reinforcement

460
1.15
400 N/mm2
6.9
106
x 660 x
1.5
103
400x2x24.2x
I
353 mm2
Use 4T12 bars
BEAMS
Reinforcement will also be required in the bottom flange to cater for flexure of the flange acting as a continuous nib.
E
3.4.4.5 Torsion in web

TsdW
= =
106 kNm
Ak
(1500
107)
x (250
107)
199.2
103 mm2
Therefore
Tsd
106 x 106
2
2vtcdtAk
x 0.385 x 20 x 107 x 199.2x103
0.32
Again by reference to Figure 3.1, cotO should fall within the limits of 0.67 to
Similarly use cotO
(DD
1.5.
1.5
As the web is subject to shear and torsion, the combined effects should now be checked to satisfy the condition
U)'
TSd
(TRd1
Vsd
<
4.3.3.2.2(3)
(VRd2
Eq n 4.47
Tsd
106 kNm
20 CdtAk
TRd1
4.3.3.1(6)
(fl
cotO + tanO
Eqn 4.40
107
2x0.385x20x
355 kN
bWzvfcd
x 199.2 x
103
1.5+(1--) 1.5
Vsd
151.5kNm
VRd2
4.3.2.4.4(2)
cotO + tanO
250 x 1300 x 0.55 x 20
TIC
Eqn 4.26
=
1650 kN
1.5 +
(1.5)
Therefore
2I
TSd
TR d112 +
1VR
(1 5!2
+ ( 650)2
0.54
<
1.0
..............
OK
Where the entire section is used to resist normal shear, each sub-section should be checked to satisfy the above interaction condition.
78
BEAMS
3.4.5 Reinforcement in web

Link reinforcement for torsion Using high yield links
A SW s 106 x 106
2x199.2x103x400x1.5
ASW
0.44 mm2/mm
Note that
for torsion relates to a single leg in the wall of the section.
Link reinforcement required for A SW
shear
=
ASW
0.46 mm2/mm from Section 3.4.3

for shear relates to the total shear link legs.
s Note that
Assuming single links, total area for one leg

A SW =
0.46s
2
+ 0 44s
.
0. 67s mm2
Using T12 links

0.67s
S
= =
113 mm2
C,)
168 mm, say 160 mm
Maximum link spacing for shear
(5) VRd2 <

Smax
VSd
3) VRd2
5.4.2.2(7)
Eqn 5.18
0.6d
864 > 300 mm

17`
Therefore
s max
300 mm
For cracking
Vsd
- 3 d
=
pWbWd
Therefore s max
(`')
50 N/mm2
4 4 2 3(5)
.
Table 4.13
300 mm
E E
3(n
=
Therefore
s max
E
2[(1500
107) + (250
107)]
3072 mm
3072
8
384 mm
(Y)
Maximum spacing to suit all conditions is 300 mm.

Use T12 links @ 160 mm crs.
BEAMS
Additional area of longitudinal steel for torsion in web

106 x 106 x 3072 x 1.5
A
Eqn 4.44
400 x 2 x 199.2 x
103
3065 mm2
Use 16T16 bars
The bars in the tension face of the web will need to be increased to provide for the additional longitudinal steel required for shear and combined with the reinforcement required for flexure.
Qom,
Area required
in
tension face for combined torsion and shear

+ 666
=
1049
(3065 x 2)
16
mm
Use 3T25 bars
3.4.6 Summary of reinforcement

Top flange
4T12 longitudinal bars R8 links @ 80 mm crs.
Bottom flange 4T12 longitudinal bars

R8 links @ 80 mm crs. Plus reinforcement for flexure of the nib
Web
3T25 longitudinal bars in tension face 7T16 bars in each side face T12 links @ 160 mm crs. Plus reinforcement for flexure
The reinforcement details are shown in Figure 3.15
4T12
to
R8-80
T12
- 160
Additional bars needed for flexure

in
T16 bars except where shown

otherwise
nib
R8-80
4T12
3T25
Figure 3.15
Beam reinforcement details
80
BEAMS
It will be seen from this example that choosing the upper limit value of cot6, to minimize the link reinforcement, results in substantial additional longitudinal
O-0
reinforcement being required. In practice the value of cot6 should be chosen so as to optimize the total reinforcement in the section.
3.5
Slenderness limits
The Code requires that a beam has an adequate factor of safety against
--+
(ND
(On
4.3.5.7
buckling.
Providing that the following requirements are met, the safety against lateral buckling may be assumed to be adequate
lot
4.3.5.7(2)
< 50b, and < 4b
Eqn 4.77
NAD
where
b
h
lot
width of the compression flange, which can be taken as for T and L beams
total depth of the beam
bent
2.5.2.2.1(3)
unrestrained length of the compression flange taking lateral bracing into account
E
2.5.2.2.1(4)
For example, consider the beam shown in Figure 3.16.

975 x 400 beam
FWAI
22
A
m
g
22m
11m
D
Figure 3.16 Beam spans and loading for slenderness check

this example the top of the beam is loaded but unrestrained (for instance, the beam is carrying a wall).
In
The second requirement is satisfied

In
i.e. h
< 4b
1600 mm
calculating lot, the unrestrained length of the compression flange can be taken as the distance between points of contraflexure.
These distances, which need to be < 50b = 20 m, can be obtained from

EC2 Figure 2.3.
Figure 2.3
lot(A-B) =
lot(B-C) =
lot(C
0.851(A-B)
0.71(B-C)
21(C
0.85 x 22
0.7
2
= =
18.7 m
= =
x 22
11
15.4 m
- D)
- D)
22 m
Spans A-C are satisfactory but span C-D is not. It is too slender and the width will need to be increased, or additional lateral retraint will need to be provided.
81
SLABS
4.1
Solid and ribbed slabs

4.1.1 One-way
spanning solid slabs
Example of a one-way spanning slab is given in Section 2.
4.1.2 Two-way spanning solid slabs

EC20) permits the use of elastic analysis, with or without redistribution, or
2.5.1.1(5)
2.5.3.5.1(2)
plastic analysis for ultimate limit state design.

Elastic analyses are commonly employed for one-way spanning slabs and for two-way spanning slabs without adequate provision to resist torsion at the corners of the slab and prevent the corners from lifting. Plastic analyses are commonly used in other situations.
>'-O
Q-0
Tabulated results for moments and shears from both types of analysis are widely available.
i_)
3.14 & 3.15
Care is necessary in subsequent design to ensure that adequate ductility is present. Where redistribution has been performed, the necessary checks should be carried out.
((DD
2.5.3.2.2(5) 2.5.3.4.2(3)
2.5.3.5.5(2)
21t
4.1.2.1 Design example of a simply-supported two-way spanning solid slab
Design a solid slab, spanning in two directions and simply-supported along each edge on brickwork walls as shown in Figure 4.1. The slab is rectangular on plan and measures 5 m by 6 m between the centre of the supports.
In
0.5 kN/m2
addition to self-weight, the slab carries a characteristic dead load of and an imposed load of 5.0 kN/m2.
(OD
The slab is in an internal environment with no exposure to the weather or aggressive conditions.
tx
Sm
-t-
Figure
4.1
Layout of slab
4.1.2.1.1 Durability
Table 4.1
ENV 206 Table NA.1
nom)
For a dry environment, exposure class is 1. Minimum concrete strength grade is C25/30.
S2
(1)
BS 8110
Tables
SLABS
For cement content and w/c ratio, refer to ENV 206 Table
3(6).
Minimum cover to reinforcement
Assume maximum bar size Nominal cover

Use nominal cover = 25 mm
ONO
Assume nominal aggregate size
= 15 mm = 20 mm = 12 mm >_ 20 mm
NAD Table 6
Note: 20 mm nominal cover is sufficient to meet the NAD') requirements in all respects.
Check requirements for fire resistance to BS 8110: Part

4.1.2.1.2 Materials Type 2 deformed reinforcement
yk =
2(2).
460 N/mm2
E
fyk
f
yd
460
1.15
400 N/mm2
E
NAD 6.4(a)
NAD
Table 3
4.1.3.3(8) NAD 6.1(a)
NAD 6.3(a)
2.2.3.2
ys
Table 2.3
C'7
C25/30 concrete with 20 mm maximum aggregate size

4.1.2.1.3 Loading
Assume 200 mm thick slab

Gk 0k 7G 7Q
5.3 kN/m2
Table 2.2
Ultimate load
4.1.2.1.4 Flexural design E
tiGGk
+ yQ 0k
14.66 kN/m2
Eqn 2.8(a)
NAD 6.2(d)
Bending moment coefficients for simply-supported two-way spanning slabs, without torsional restraint at the corners or provision to resist uplift at the corners, based on the Grashof-Rankine Formulae, are widely published and are
reproduced in BS 8110.
2
BS 8110
Table 3.14
MSdx
=
=
sxnlx
MSdy
asynlX
For
y
I
USX
.->
1.2
0.084,
aSy
0.059
SLABS
Giving
Msdx Msdx
30.8 kN m/m
21.6 kNm/m
For short span with reinforcement in bottom layer
`-
12
200 - 25 2
169
mm
Msdx
0.043
d
Asfyk
0.099 < 0.45
................................
()j
OK
2.5.3.4.2(5)
0.052
bdf,k Therefore A
478 mm2/m
Use T12 @ 200 mm crs. (566 mm2/m) in short span

For longer span
d
Msdy
200 - 25 - 12 - 6
157
mm
0.035
Asfyk
0.042
bdf,k
Therefore A S
Use T12
4.1.2.1.5 Shear
Vsdx
@a
359 mm2/m
300 mm crs. (377 mm2/m) in long span

4.3.2
(71
8aSx
24.6 kN/m
Vsdy
8 sy
14.4 kN/m
The shear resistance with no axial load:

VRd,
7Rdk(1.2
40pl)bwd
4.3.2.3 Eqn 4.18

Table 4.8
Where
T IT
Rd
0.3 N/mm2
SLABS
Assume > 50% of reinforcement curtailed at support
k
Assume
1.6-d
Asl
1.431 -r,
Pt
bd W
=
87.0 kN/m
> 0.02
Figure 4.12
Hence
VRd,
>
VSdx
24.6 kN/m
4.3.2.1 P(2)
4.3.2.2 4.1.2.1.6 Serviceability
c'7
deflection
4.4.3.2
Control by limiting span/effective depth ratio based on the shorter span for a two-way spanning slab.
As.prov
566 mm2/m,
p =
0.0033
NAD Table 7 gives basic span/effective depth ratios which are based on yk = 400 N/mm2.
assumed to be
(On
4.4.3.2(4)
Note 2 to NAD Table 7 states that modification to the tabulated values for nominal reinforced concrete should not be carried out to take into account service stresses in the steel (refer to EC2 Clause 4.4.3.2(4)). However, it is assumed that the correction ought to be made for concrete with 0.15% <_ p < 0.5% but that the resulting values should not exceed those tabulated in the NAD for nominally reinforced concrete.
(n
v):
Basic limiting span/effective depth ratios are:

Concrete lightly stressed (p = 0.5%): 25 Concrete nominally reinforced (p = 0.15%): 34 By interpolation at p = 0.330/o: 29.4
NAD
6.4(e)&(f) Table 7
The actual service steel stress modification factor is

250 400
yk(As,req/As,prov)
400 460 x 478/566
1.03
s
=
Therefore, permissible span/effective depth ratio

1.03
x 29.4
30.3
<_
34
4.4.3.2(3)
Since span > 7 m, no further adjustment is required. Actual span/effective depth ratio
5000
169
U0)
Note: No modification to the longer span reinforcement is required in cases where short span reinforcement is increased to comply with deflection requirements.
-t5
296
<
30.3
....
OK
BS 8110
3.5.7
SLABS
4.1.2.1.7 Serviceability
cracking
4.4.2.3(1)
For a slab with h
necessary
4.1.2.1.8 Detailing
if
<_ 200 mm, no further measures to control cracking are the requirements of EC2 Clause 5.4.3 have been applied.
C)-
Detailing requirements for cast in situ solid slabs, including two-way slabs
5.4.3
5.4.3.1(1)
Slab thickness, h
200
> 50 mm
........................
OK
For the short span, use alternately staggered bars and anchor 50% of the mid-
5.4.3.2.2(1)
span reinforcement at the supports.

Anchorage force, F
Nsd
ar
-FU
Vsd
,
a
+ Nsd
5.4.3.2.1(1) 5421 4 (2 )
.. ..
=
=
Eqn 5.15
5.4.3.2.1(1)
Therefore
FS
Vsd
24.6 kN/m
As,req
F
'yd
24.6
103
61.5 mm2 /m
400
As,prov
283 mm /m
..................................
albAs req
OK
Net bond length,
Ib,net
A s,prov
as
Ib,min
5.2.3.4.1(1) Eq n 5.4
(.(j
1.0 for straight bars
5.2.3.4.1
(+7
1b
yd
5.2.2.3
fbd
Eq n 5.3
(Y)
All
bars
fbd
in
slabs with h
=
<_
250 mm may be assumed to have good bond.

E
5.2.2.1 Table 5.3
2.7 N/mm2
SIN
12
1b
400
x
2.7
444 mm
E
4
0.31b
Ib,min
-K
100 or 100 mm
133 mm
E
5.2.3.4.1(1) Eqn 5.5
In
calculating
1.0
Ib,net
take
As,req
as mid-span reinforcement/4 giving

1
NAD 6.5(c)
5.4.2.1.4(3)
Ib,r.et
444 x
222 mm
>
Ib,min
OK
Eq n 5.4
(J1
SLABS
For a direct support, the anchorage length required is

(2/3)1 b, net
5.4.2.1.4(3)
T12
- 300
T12-200
alternately
staggered
220
(2/3) 1b,net
148
Figure 4.2
Section through short span support
The use of (2/3)1 b,net at a direct support is an allowance for the transverse compression due to the support reaction.
AS
.9
0.0015btd
254 mm2/m
5.4.3.2.1(3)
5.4.2.1.1(1)
L()
yk
Minimum area provided (T12 @ 400 mm crs.) near support

= 283 mm2/m
......................
OK
Table 3
Maximum spacing used
= 400 mm near support
..............
5.4.3.2.1(4)
OK
4.1.2.2 Design example of a continuous two-way spanning solid slab
Design a solid slab spanning between beams, as shown

In addition to self-weight, the slab carries a 1.0 kN/m2 and an imposed load of 5.0 kN/m2.
in
Figure 4.3.
characteristic dead load of
87
ADD
Maximum bar spacing
3h
> 500 mm
NAD
c11
0.6b d
C71
148 mm
Figure
5.12(a)
SLABS
Supporting beams
6m
6m
6m
7-2m
7-2m
2m
Figure 4.3
Layout of slab
For a dry environment, exposure class is 1. Minimum concrete strength grade is C25/30.
For cement content and w/c ratio, refer to ENV 206 Table 3.
Table 4.1
ENV 206 Table NA.1
Minimum cover to reinforcement
= 15 mm
NAD
Assume nominal aggregate size = 20 mm Assume maximum bar size = 12 mm

Nominal cover
LC)
3a)
Table 6
NAD 6.4(a)
u2)
Use nominal cover
Note: 20 mm nominal cover is sufficient to meet the NAD requirements
Check requirements for fire resistance to BS 8110: Part 2.

4.1.2.2.2 Materials
Type 2 deformed reinforcement,
vk =
C25130 concrete with 20 mm maximum aggregate size.
>_
20 mm
25 mm
NAD
in all
respects.
Table 3
4.1.3.3(8)
NAD 6.1(a)
460 N/mm2
SLABS
4.1.2.2.3 Loading
Assume 200 mm thick slab

Gk Qk
yG yo
=
=
4.8 + 1.0
5.0 kN/m2
5.8 kN/m2
= =
1.35 or 1.0
1.5 or 0.0
Table 2.2
For non-sensitive structures, a single design value for permanent actions may be applied throughout the structure, i.e. 'YG = 1.35 throughout.
2.3.2.3
Maximum ultimate load
1.35 x 5.8 + 1.5 1.35
5.0
15.33 kN/m2
Minimum ultimate load
5.8
7.83 kN/m2
4.1.2.2.4 Load cases
For continuous beams and slabs in buildings without cantilevers subjected to dominantly uniformly distributed loads, it will generally be sufficient to consider only the following load cases.
C-.
2.5.1.2(4)
a)_
(a)
Alternate spans carrying the design variable and permanent load (yoQk + y(3Gk), other spans carrying only the design permanent load, yGGk.
Any two adjacent spans carrying the design variable and permanent
(b)
load (yQQk + yGGk). All other spans carrying only the design permanent load, yGGk.
4.1.2.2.5 Flexural design
((DD
Bending moment coefficients for two-way spanning slabs supported on four edges, with provision for torsion at the corners, have been calculated based on both elastic and yield line theory. The coefficients published in BS 8110: Part 1, Table 3.15, are based on yield line analysis and are used in this example.
(f1
coo
BS 8110 Table 3.15

L')
Nc
For continuous slabs the effects of rotational restraint from the supports can
be ignored.
Yield line methods can only be used for very ductile structural elements. Use high ductility steel Class H to prEN 10080(8).
No direct check on rotational capacity is required
The area of steel should not exceed a value corresponding to

X
For the yield line (kinematic) method, a variety of possible mechanisms should be considered. This is assumed in the use of the published bending moment coefficients.
(ti
2.5.3.3(3)
2.5.3.2.2(5) NAD
Table 5
if
high ductility steel is used.
2.5.3.5.5(3)
2.5.3.5.5(2)
L'7
M
0.25 which is equivalen t to
0. 102
bd2 ck
2.5.3.5.5(4)
89
SLABS
The ratio of moments at a continuous edge to the span moment should be between 0.5 and 2.0. This is true for the published coefficients.
2.5.3.5.5(5)
Consider the design of the corner panel,
D, in
Figure 4.4.
2.5.1.2
0,032- 0042
-0.032
-'0.056 -0.042
N 1 O
O
O L!1 O
0.063 -0.048 0.036
I
aI
-0.048
OD
N 1 O
J O
-0.032 -0.037
02
rnI
m
p
M
cl"
O O
-0.037
6 X28 -0.037 -0.045
0'U3
0042
0047
oI
0
<-.
Figure 4.4
Bending moment coefficients
ly/1x
1.2
Using the coefficients shown in Figure 4.4 and the method described in BS 8110 to adjust moments for adjacent panels with unequal conditions, the following moments and shears can be calculated for this panel:
In the 6 m direction,
Msup
BS 8110 3.5.3.6
= = = =
29.7 kNm/m 28.5 kNm/m

21.0 kNm/m
Mspan
In the 7.2 m direction,
Msup
Mspan
20.6 kNm/m
The support moments calculated can be further reduced by an amount AMSd

AMSd
2.5.3.3(4)
Fsd,sup
bsup/8
Eqn 2.16
where
Fsd,sup
= design support reaction compatible with the analysis moments.

= =
81.9 kN/m
In the 6 m direction, Fsd,sup In the 7.2 m direction, Fsdsup
69.9 kN/m
For a 300 mm wide supporting beam:

AMSd
= =
3.1
kNm/m kNm/m
In the 7.2 m direction, AMsd
2.6
Therefore, the design support moments are:

CD
Msup
=
=
26.6 kNm/m
E
In the 7.2 m direction, Msup
:-I
18.4 kNm/m
SLABS
For the short span, with the reinforcement in the first layer
of
200
25
12
169
mm
Msup
bd2fck
x
0.038
d
As
0.087
<
0.25
...............................
OK
2.5.3.5.5(2)
yk
0.045
bdick
AS
414 mm2/m
Use T12 @ 250 mm crs. (452 mm2/m) T in short span
The span moment is similar to that over the support and the same reinforcement may be used in the bottom
For the long span, with the reinforcement in the second layer
200 - 25 - 12 -
12
157
mm
Msup
bd2 ck
0.030
0.068 < 0.45
................................
E E
OK
As ykyk
0.035
bd ck
AS
297 mm2/m
Use T12 @ 300 mm crs. (377 mm2/m) T in long span
(J)
The span moment is again similar to that over the support and the same reinforcement may be used in the bottom
For arrangements of reinforcement in middle and edge strips use BS 8110. The NAD directs the use of BS 8110 where torsion reinforcement is required in the corners of panels.
E E
BS 8110 3.5.3.5 NAD 6.5(e)

5.4.3.2.2
4.1.2.2.6 Shear Use forces consistent with the analysis moments.

In the 6 m direction: At internal beam, VM, = At edge, Vext =
4.3.2
9'3
0.47
0.31
x 15.33 x 6 = x 15.33 x 6 =
43.2 kN/m 28.5 kN/m
91
SLABS
DDS
In the 7.2 m direction:
At internal beam, V't = At edge, ext =
x 15.33 x 6 0.26 x 15.33 x 6

0.4
=
=
36.8 kN/m 23.9 kN/m
VRd1
=
=
[TRdk(1.2 + 40pr) + 0.15vcpl bWd
4.3.2.3 Eqn 4.18
TRd
0.3 N/mm2
Table 4.8
5.4.3.2.2
C,)
Assume
> 50% of the bottom reinforcement curtailed at edge support.

=
1.6
k
Pt
0.169
1.431
A si
b W of
0.00134
>
0.02
Note: Ensure detailing provides necessary anchorage to Asl. See EC2 Figure
4.12 for definition of Asi.
Therefore
VRdl
It
(CD
91.0 kN/m
VRdl
>
Vsd
28.5 kN/m at edge support
is
also clear that
>
Vsd
= 43.2 kN/m at the internal beam.
4.3.2.1 P(2)
4.3.2.2(2)
deflection
4.4.3.2 4.4.3.2(5)
Control by limiting span/effective depth ratio based on the shorter span for a two-way spanning slab.
Actual span/effective depth ratio
i0)
6000
169
35.5
L(7
For a corner panel use structural system 2.

It
may be normally assumed that slabs are lightly stressed (p
<-
0.5%).
Table 4.14 4.4.3.2(5)
NAD 6.4(e) and (f) allows the basic span/effective depth ratio to be interpolated, according to the reinforcement provided, for values in the range 0.15o/o < p < 0.5%. Basic span/effective depth ratio (p = 0.5%) = 32 (p = 0.15%) = 44
For the span moment AS = 441 mm2/m rm
As,prov
CJ)
(C]
NAD Table 7
452 mm2/m,
CJ)
0.27% =
39.9
Basic span/effective depth ratio (p = 0.27%)
SLABS
Using reinforcement with f > 400 N/mm2, this value should be multiplied to reflect the actual service steel stress by the factor
250
as
4.4.3.2(4)
400
400 x 452
fyk x
A s, req A s,prov
460 x 441
0.89
Therefore, permissible span/effective depth ratio
0.89
x 39.9
35.5
...............................
OK
Note 2 to NAD Table 7 is taken to mean that the resulting span/effective depth ratio, after the service stress modification, is limited to the value tabulated for nominally reinforced concrete. In this case the value is 44.
E
LL.
cracking
<_
200 mm no further measures are required to control cracking, provided the requirements of EC2 Clause 5.4.3 have been applied.
For a slab with h
4.4.2.3(1)
2-6
4.1.2.2.9 Detailing
5.4.3
Slab thickness, h
200 mm
>
50 mm
....................
OK
5.4.3.1(1)
For the short span, use alternately staggered bars and anchor 50% of the mid-
5.4.3.2.2(1)
span reinforcement at the external support.

Anchorage force (at external support)
F
Nsd
=
=
Vsd
al ' + Nsd
5.4.2.1.4(2)
Eqn 5.15
a,
d
Vsd
5.4.3.2.1(1)
F
A
s,req
= _
28.5 kN/m 28.5 x 103
FS
71
mm2/m
Yd
As,prov
400
226 MM 2/M
..................................
OK
Net bond length

=
X
1b,net
CYalb
A s, req
A
lb,min
s,prov
5.2.3.4.1(1) Eqn 5.4
aa
0.7 for curved bars

X
f
yd
lb
=
4fbd
5.2.2.3 Eqn 5.3
SLABS
For all bars in slabs with h

fbd
<_
250 mm, good bond may be assumed.

E
5.2.2.1
2.7 N/mm2
12
Table 5.3
=
444 mm
E E
lb
4
lb,net
x
take
400
27
In
calculating
As,req
as mid-span reinforcement/4.
x
NAD 6.5(c)
5.4.2.1.4(3)
1b,
net
0.7
x 444
156 mm >
lb,min
.....
OK
E E
Bars to extend into support for a distance

3
lb,net
256 mm
Figure
giving sufficient end cover in 300 mm wide section

E
...............
5.12(b)
OK
4.1.2.2.10 Top reinforcement at edge beam
Design moment
M
Mspan/4
7.125 kNm/m
5.4.3.2.2(2)
bd2fck
As
yk
0.01
0.012
bdck
As
110 mm2/m
As,min

0.6b d
As
t
5.4.3.2.1(3)
K 0.0015btd =
7t
254 mm2/m
L()
yk
Use T10 @ 250 mm crs. bars extending support into span
0.21
from inner face of
5.4.3.2.2(2)
CJ)
SLABS
T10-500 secondary
transverse
12 00
reinforcement
T12
- 300 middle strip

300 edge
T10T10-250
strip
LT12-250 alternately
260
600
staggered
Edge
strip
Middle strip
Figure 4.5
Detail at edge beam
4.1.2.2.11 Secondary transverse reinforcement
top
314 mm2/m
Principal reinforcement, T10 @ 250 mm crs., A. =
Secondary reinforcement,
Maximum spacing
=
AS
0.2
314
63 mm2/m
E
5.4.3.2.1(2)
500 mm
NAD
Table 3
Use T10 @ 500 mm crs. (157 mm2/m)
5.4.3.2.1(4)
5.4.3.2.3
(+7
4.1.2.2.12 Corner reinforcement

Use the detailing guidance given in BS 8110.
NAD 6.5(e) 5.4.3.2.3

5.4.2.1.5
4.1.2.2.13 Anchorage of bottom reinforcement at intermediate supports
Retain not less than a quarter of mid-span reinforcement at support and provide not less than 100 anchorage.
5.4.2.1.4(1)
Provide continuity bars lapped with bottom reinforcement as shown in Figure 4.6. Using alternately staggered bars with continuity for 50% of the mid-span reinforcement.
Minimum lap,
lb,net
Figure
5.13(b)
1.4
x 444 x
1
2
,IN
310 mm
Figure 4.6
Detail at interior support
SLABS
4.1.2.2.14 Transverse reinforcement at laps

No requirement for slabs.
NAD 6.5(b)
5.2.4.1.2
4.1.3 Ribbed slabs

EC2 permits ribbed slabs to be treated as solid slabs for the purposes of analysis,
2.5.2.1(5)
provided that the flange and transverse ribs have sufficient torsional stiffness.
4.1.3.1 Design example
of a ribbed slab
in
Design a ribbed slab spanning between beams as shown

In addition to self-weight, 1.0 kN/m2 and an imposed
Figure 4.7.
the slab carries a characteristic dead load of load of 5.0 kN/m2.
Figure 4.7
Ribbed slab spanning between beams
III
96
III
SLABS
4.1.3.1.1
Durability
For a dry environment, exposure class is 1. Minimum concrete strength grade is C25/30. For cement content and w/c ratio, refer to ENV 206 Table 3.
Table 4.1 ENV 206 Table NA.1
Minimum cover to reinforcement Assume nominal aggregate size Assume maximum bar size
(3D (3D
15 mm
= =
>_
20 mm 20 mm
20 mm
NAD Table 6
Nominal cover
Use nominal cover
NAD 6.4(a)
25 mm
E
NAD
in all
Note: 20 mm nominal cover is sufficient to meet the NAD requirements

0
respects.
Table 3
4.1.3.3(8)
Check requirements for fire resistance to BS 8110: Part 2.

4.1.3.1.2 Materials
yk
NAD 6.1(a)
460 N/mm2
E
vk
460 =
1.15
vd
400 N/mm2
l's
2.2.3.2P(1) Table 2.3

4.1.3.1.3 Analysis model
Span 6 m
>_ >_
x slab depth x 0.275 =

= = 600
175
<_
1.1
.............................
...........................
= 500 mm
2.5.2.1(3)
Rib spacing Rib depth
<_
1500 mm 4 x rib width
00
(J1
OK
00
..........
50 mm
OK OK
2.5.2.1(5)
Flange depth =
100 mm
10
clear spacing between ribs
>_
...
OK
Transverse ribs (at supports only)
Spacing
6 m
>
10
slab depth
2.75 m
E
Hence the ribbed slab may not be treated as a solid slab in the analysis under the terms of this clause unless intermediate transverse ribs are incorporated.
This is not always desirable.
2.5.2.1(5)
The model adopted in this example uses gross concrete section properties of the T shape in sagging regions and a rectangular section, based on the rib width, in the hogging region.
EC2 Figure 2.3 has been used initially to define the extent of the hogging. This method can clearly be refined.
SLABS
4.1.3.1.4 Effective span

Jeff
2.5.2.2.2
In
+ al + a2
Eqn 2.15
Assume 300 mm wide supporting beams
ln
-t6
5700 mm
= =
a. taken a.
Nip
a1
at edge beam
as (2)
= =
150 mm
150 mm
E
Figure 2.4(a) Figure 2.4(b)
a2 at central
leff
beam
(2)
6000 mm
For ratio of adjacent

to
spans between
=
0.85 x 6000
and 1.5
= 5100 mm
0.851,
2.5.2.2.1(4)
Figure 2.3
4.1.3.1.5 Effective width of flanges
2.5.2.2.1
L()
((DD
Effective flange width is assumed constant across the span for continuous beams
in
2.5.2.2.1(2)
buildings.
`<G
For
a symmetrical
bell
beam
2.5.2.2.1(3)
= =
bW
+ (5)
Ell
to
<
b
<_
Eqn 2.13
600 mm
125 +
(5) x
5100
Therefore
bell
600 mm
4.1.3.1.6 Loading
(Y)
Gk
= =
3.6 + 1.0
5.0 kN/m2
= 4.6 kN/m2
0k
'YG
= =
1.35
1.5
To
Table 2.2 2.3.2.3P(2) Table 2.2

= 1.35 x 4.6 + 1.5 x 5.0
1.35
Maximum ultimate load Minimum ultimate load
13.7 kN/m2
x 4.6
(A)
= 6.2 kN/m2
Design for ultimate limit state using linear elastic method, choosing not to redistribute moments.
2.5.3.2.2
2.5.1.2
Consider the following load combinations:

(a)
Alternate spans carrying the design variable and permanent load (yQQk + -yGGk), other spans carrying only the design permanent load, yGGk.
((DD
(b) Any two adjacent spans carrying the design variable and permanent load (yQQk + yGGd. All other spans carrying only the design
permanent load,
tiGGk.
(CD
D))
()0
SLABS
-30
(-37 0)
26.7 1248)
267 (248)
BENDING MOMENT ENVELOPE (kNm)

Notes
1.
Values are per rib Values in brackets are

those obtained
2.
when
29.8 (30-8)
21-0
is
taken as uniform
throughout the span
(20-2)
-21
(-20
2)
-298 (-308)
SHEAR FORCE ENVELOPE (kN)
Figure 4.8
Results of analysis
The following results are taken from the analysis (see Figure 4.8).
M span
Msup
Fsd,sup
= = =
26.7 kNm/rib
30.5 kNm/rib
59.6 kN/rib
Support moment can be reduced by an amount AMsd where

AMsd
d
b
16
NIA
C/)
2.5.3.3(4)
59.6
(CD
Therefore
M $u p
=
=
(l)
0.3/8
2.2 kNm/rib
Eqn 2.16
28.3 kNm/rib
=
275 - 25 - 10 E
232
mm
E
600 mm (span), 125 mm (support)
99
SLABS
Mspan
bd2f,k
0.033
0.075
< 0.45
=
................................
17.4
OK
OK
2.5.3.4.2(5)
Neutral axis in flange (x

Asfyk
< 100 mm)
...................
0.039
bdf,k A =
295 mm2/rib
Use 2T16 (403 mm2/rib) bottom in span
Msup
bd 2f,:k
Therefore
0.168 >
d
.r-
>
0.45
This section may be analyzed to take account of the varying width of the compression zone, as shown in Figure 4.9.
0
Figure 4.9 Analysis of section
Consider x
0
<_
0.45d
94 mm as a trial value
E
Using the rectangular stress block diagram with

im)
0.85 gives
NAD
Table 3 4 2 1 3 3 ( 12 )
.
1.5
(J)
a Cd
0.8x
=
=
0 85
.
25
4 2 N/mm2
.
Figure 4.4
75 mm
140 mm
b av
100
SLABS
z
FC
39
193 mm
0.8x(a cd)bav =
(232
75 x
14.2
10s
x 140
149.1 kN
M0
149.1
39)
103
28.8
>
28.3 kNm
....
OK
As
28.3 x 106
400 x 193
367 mm2/rib
Use 4T12 (452 mm2/rib) top at interior support
Minimum longitudinal reinforcement with bt

AS
160 mm
5.4.2.1.1(1)
.9
0.6
btdl
vk
.9
0.0015 btd
56 mm2/rib < As,Pov
...
OK
5.4.2.1.1(2)
Maximum longitudinal reinforcement

As
0.04Ao
3450 mm
>
As,prov
OK
4.1.3.1.8 Shear in rib

Vsd
4.3.2
29.8 kN/rib at interior support
Shear resistance with no axial load

VRdl
TRd
= = =
'r
T Rd
k(1.2 + 40p) bWd
0.3 N/mm2
1.6
4.3.2.3 Eqn 4.18 Table 4.8

.9
1
d =
1.368
Based on top reinforcement:

Asr
Figure 4.12
= =
=
452 mm2/rib
can
bW
pr
125 mm
4sr =
bW d
0.0155
> 0.02
Giving
VRdl
21.6 kN/rib
<
Vsd
Therefore shear reinforcement must be provided.

Use the standard design method for shear:
VRd3
4.3.2.2(3) 4.3.2.2(7)
>
4.3.2.4.3
VSd
VRd3
Vd
VWd
Eqn 4.22
SLABS
where
('7
Vd Therefore
VRdl
21.6 kN/rib
4.3.2.4.3(1)
A SW
d
0.9df,wd
>_
29.8
21.6
= 8.2 kN/rib
Eqn 4.23
s
5.4.2.2(7)
Check maximum longitudinal spacing of links

VRd2
cdbw
x 0.9d
=
0
(1
+ COta)
For vertical stirrups, cot
0.7
ck
Eqn 4.25
VRd2
=
VRd2
0.5
16.7
(O
<
VSd
<
3)
VRd2
Therefore
smax
0.6d =
139
> 300 mm
z
Eqn 5.18
Table 5.5
Try mild steel links at 125 mm crs.
SIN
0.575
>_
0.5
200
Eqn 4.21
x 0.575 x
x 125 x 0.9 x 232 x 10-3=125kN
Pw,min
0.0022
0.00226W s
E
35 mm2
E
= 57 mm2)
Use R6 links @ 125 mm crs. (Asw
ywd
250
1.15
217 N/mm2
57
125
0.9
x 232 x
217 =
103
20.7
> 8.2 kN/rib
...
OK
Link spacing may be increased where

VSd
<_
(s)
0.8d
VRd2
25 kN/rib
smax
> 300 =
185 mm
Eqn 5.17
Use R6 links @ 175 mm crs. apart from region within 0.6 m of interior support
V,d
14.7
> 3.4 kN/rib
.............................
OK
SLABS
,It
4.1.3.1.9
Shear between web and flanges

AFd
VSd
4.3.2.5
Eqn 4.33
(2)
SIN
to
2550 mm
Figure 4.14
Maximum longitudinal force in the flanges

FC
_
= =
fcd(0.8x)b
d
F
0.075 at mid-span
14.2
0.8
x 0.075 x 232 x600 _

103
122kN
Force to one side of web

AFd
122
600 - 195
2
x 600
41.2 kN
Therefore
NIA
Vsd
41.2
16.2 kN/m
2.55 0.2 cdhf = 0.2 x 16.7 +

s,
VRd2
x 100 = 334 kN/m >
VSd
.. OK
Eqn 4.36 Eq n 4.34

Eqn 4.37
V_
With Asf
2.5To,,h,
=
=
0
2.5 x 0.3
VRd3
x 100
75 kN/m
>
VSd
...........
OK
Eqn 4.35
4.1.3.1.10 Topping reinforcement
No special guidance is given in EC2 regarding the design of the flange spanning between ribs. The Handbook to BS 8110(13) gives the following guidance.
.CJ))
car
361.5
Thickness of topping used to contribute to structural strength Although a nominal reinforcement of 0.12% is suggested in the topping (3.662), it is not insisted upon, and the topping is therefore expected to transfer load to the adjacent ribs without the assistance of reinforcement. The mode of transfer involves arching action and this is the reason for the insistence that the depth be at least one-tenth of the clear distance between the ribs.
Minimum flange depths are the same in EC2 and BS 8110 and the above is therefore equally applicable. Provide minimum reinforcement transversely and where top bars in rib, which have been spread over width of flange, are curtailed.
.v)
2.5.2.1(5)
E_0
SLABS
Asf
4
<
0.6btdflfyk
hf
0.0015btdf
Eqn 5.14
df
100 mm
Therefore, conservatively
Asf
150 mm2/m
Use T8 @ 200 mm crs. (251 mm2/m) or consider fabric
7t
4.1.3.1.11
Deflection
6000
Actual span/effective depth ratio
232
4.4.3.2
25.9
403 Mid-span reinforcement ratio, p
600 x 232
0.0029
Therefore section is lightly stressed.
4.4.3.2.(5)
NAD
Basic span/effective depth ratio (interpolating for p) = 39.2

400
Table 7
x 403
1.19
Modification factor for steel stress
460 x 295
Since flange width
> 3 x rib width, a 0.8 modification factor
is
required.
Since span > 7 m, no further modification is required.

Permitted span/effective depth ratio = 39.2 x 1.19 x 0.8
=
37.3
>
25.9
.................................
OK
4.1.3.1.12 Cracking
of 0.3 mm
For exposure class 1, crack width has no influence on durability and the limit could be relaxed. However, the limit of 0.3 mm is adopted for this
4.4.2.1(6)
example.
Satisfy the requirements for control of cracking without calculation. Check section
4.4.2.3(2)
4.4.2.2(3)
at mid-span:
Minimum reinforcement, A.
Note:
-O_
kckct,effAct/as
Eq n 4.78
can be conservatively taken as the area below the neutral axis for the plain concrete section, ignoring the tension reinforcement, as shown in Figure 4.10.
Act
00^D
SLABS
92
Neutral axis
1100
175
35
125
35
Figure 4.10
Tensile zone of plain concrete section
Depth to neutral axis

Act
QS
92 mm
= =
160 x 175 + 600 (100
92)
32800 mm2
100%f ,k
460 N/mm2
E
4.4.2.2(3)
fct,eff
III
= =
=
recommended value 3 N/mm2

0.4 for normal bending
0.8
kc
k
AS
0.4
0.8
x 3 x 32800/460 = 69 mm2 <

E E
As,prov
.....
OK
Eqn 4.78 Table 4.11
Check limit on bar size.

Quasi-permanent loads
=
Gk +
0.30 k
6.1
kN/m2
4.4.2.3(3) 2.3.4
Ratio of quasi-permanent/ultimate loads
=136.7 =
0.45
Eqn 2.9(c)
NAD
Table
Estimate of steel stress
0.45 x
LC)
As,req
x fyd
A S,Prav
0.45 x 295 x 400 403
(Y)
132 N/mm2
Maximum bar size

For cracks
32 > 16 mm provided
..................
OK
Table 4.11
caused dominantly by loading, crack widths generally will not be
4.4.2.3(2)
excessive.
4.1.3.1.13 Detailing
Minimum clear distance between bars = 0 r, 20 mm

Nominal clear distance in rib
5.2.1(3)
49 mm
......................
OK
SLABS
Bond and anchorage lengths:

For h > 250 mm bottom reinforcement is in good bond conditions. Top reinforcement is in poor bond conditions.
((DD
5.2.2
5.2.2.1
Figure 5.1(c)
Therefore, ultimate bond stresses are Bottom reinforcement,

Top reinforcement,
fbd
fbd
=
0.7
2.7 N/mm2
x 2.7
5.2.2.2(2)
Table 5.3
=
1.89 N/mm2
5.2.2.2(2)
Basic anchorage length, lb
= Ofyd
4fbd
5.2.2.3
Eqn 5.3
c4)
For top reinforcement,
1b
x 400
4 x 1.89
530
For bottom reinforcement, lb
0 x 400
4 x 2.7
370
Anchorage of bottom reinforcement at end support.

Treat as a solid slab and retain not less than half of the mid-span reinforcement.
Use 2T12 L bars bottom at end support
5.4.2.1.4
5.4.3.2.2(1)
Anchorage force for this reinforcement with zero design axial load
0
a,
F
where
VSd
VSd
5.4.2.1.4(2)
Eqn 5.15
21
kN/rib
5.4.2.1.3(1)
For vertical shear reinforcement calculated by the standard method

ar
z(1
Iota)/2 4
90 and z is taken as 0.9d

5.4.3.2.1(1)
E
Although this ribbed slab falls outside the solid slab classification requirements for analysis, treat as a solid slab for detailing and take al = d.
c,5
Therefore
Fs
As,req
21 21
kN/rib
x
400
103
53 mm2
<
As
Prov
OK
Required anchorage length for bottom reinforcement at support:

as 1bAs req
1b,net 19
5.2.3.4
5.2.3.4.1(1)
Eqn 5.4
1b,min
A s, Prov = =
as
0.7 for curved bars in tension

0.31b
lb,mn
11.10
.9 100
or 100 mm
Eqn 5.5
106
SLABS
In calculations of should be taken Ib,net' As,req
As,spanA
101 mm2
NAD 6.5(c) 5.4.2.1.4(3)
A s,prov
lb,net
=
0.7
226 mm2
x 37 x
12
101
139 mm
226
>
lb,min
.......
OK
Eqn 5.4
Minimum transverse reinforcement (for indirect support):

Ast
E E
5.2.3.3
(`")
As14
226/4
57 mm2
Use 1T8 bar as transverse reinforcement
Minimum top reinforcement at end support:

MsUp
5.4.2.1.2(1)
=
=
(4)
26.7
6.7 kNm/rib
0.040
Therefore nominal reinforcement is sufficient.

Use 2T12 L bars top as link hangers

2T12 per
rib
Figure 5.12
L
TO
R6 - 175 links
L
2T12
2T16 per rib
per rib
100
622
Is
Lb,
net
b/3
Figure
4.11
Detail at edge support

ls,
Provide full lap length,

is
1b,neta1
for bottom bars:
5.2.4.1.3
-K ls,min
For 100% of bars lapped and b
> 20,
1.4
Hence with a = 1.0 and A s,req = A s,prov

lb,net
=
=
lb
370
37
12
444 mm
twin
0.3 acxllb
187 mm
g 150 or 200 mm
Eqn 5.7
NAD
Table 3 Figure 5.6

Eq n 5.4
Eqn 5.8
SLABS
Therefore
is
444 x 1.4
622 mm
C"6
>
ls,min
................
OK
Transverse reinforcement at lapped splices should be provided as for a beam section. Since 0 < 16 mm, nominal shear links provide adequate transverse
reinforcement.
5.2.4.1.2(1)
5.4.2.1.5
L()
Anchorage of bottom reinforcement at interior support. Treat as a solid slab and continue 50% of mid-span bars into support.
(OD
OD)
5.4.3.2.2(1)
Figure
5.13(b)
4T12 per rib
R6-
125
links
L 2T16
'-
per rib
M6
per rib
b,
net
10
160
Figure 4.12
((D
Detail at interior support
cages because of the intersection of the bottom reinforcement with the supporting beam cage. It is suggested that providing suitably lapped continuity bars through the support should obviate the need to continue the main steel into the support.
This detailing prohibits the easy use of prefabricated rib
The arrangement of the reinforcement within the section including the anchorage
of the links is shown in Figure 4.13.
a(0
--I
Figure 5.10
Figure 4.13 Arrangement of reinforcement
108
--+
-Z-
5.2.5
NAD
Tables
3&8
5.4.2.1.2(2)
SLABS
4.2 Flat slabs

4.2.1 Flat slabs in braced frames
The same frame is used in each of the following examples, but column heads are introduced in the second case.
4.2.1.1 Design example of a
flat slab without column heads
Design the slab shown in Figure 4.14 to support an additional dead load of 1.0 kN/m2 and an imposed load of 5.0 kN/m2.
Figure 4.14
Plan of structure
The area shown is part of a larger structure which is laterally restrained in two orthogonal directions by core walls.
(CD
(n-
The slab is 225 mm thick. All columns are 300 mm square and along grid 5 there is an edge beam 450 mm deep x 300 mm wide.
For a dry environment, exposure class is
0
1.
Minimum concrete strength grade is C25/30.

Since a more humid environment is likely to exist at the edges of the slab, increase concrete strength grade to C30/37.
7-C For cement content and w/c ratio, refer to ENV 206 Table 3.
v3)
SLABS
Nominal cover to reinforcement
20 mm
NAD
Table 6 Nominal cover to all bars .9 bar size

.9
NAD 6.4(a)
= 20 mm
.
nominal aggregate size

20 mm
OK
4.1.3.3(5)
Use nominal cover
4.2.1.1.2 Materials
fvk
460 N/mm2
NAD 6.3(a)
4.2.1.1.3 Load cases

It
is sufficient to
consider the following load cases
2.5.1.2
(a)
Alternate spans loaded with yGGk + yoQk and yGGk on other
spans.
(b)
Any two adjacent spans carrying yGGk + yoQk and all other
spans carrying
Gk
yGGk.
= =
0.225 x 24 + 1.0
CJ)
6.4 kN/m2
yGGk
1.35
x 6.4
=
8.7 kN/m2
Table 2.2
yGGk + yoQk
8.7 + 1.5
x 5.0
16.2 kN/m2
Eqn 2.8(a)
4.2.1.1.4 Analysis
Analyses are carried out using idealizations of both the geometry and the behaviour of the structure. The idealization selected shall be appropriate to the problem being considered.
(On
2.5.1.1.P(3) and P(4)
No guidance is given in EC2 on the selection of analysis models for flat slabs, or on the division of panels into middle and column strips and the distribution of analysis moments between these strips. This is left to the assessment of individual engineers. The requirements set down in BS 8110 for the above points are taken as a means of complying with EC2 Clause 2.5.1.1P(3).
(D3
cam
-00
00,
om'
EC2 allows analysis of beams and slabs as continuous over pinned supports. It then permits a reduction in the support moment given by
AMsa
The analysis in this example includes framing into columns. Thus the reduction AMSd is not taken.
Consider two frames from Figure 4.14 as typical:
(i)
cmn
>-O
(C)
2.5.3.3(3) 2.5.3.3(4)
Fsasup bsup /8
(ii)
Grid 3/A-D subframe Grid B.
110
SLABS
Analysis results for the frames described above are given in Figure 4.15. The results for each frame are practically identical as the analysis for Grid B has an increased loaded width (5.2 m), since this is the first internal support for frames in the orthogonal direction.
Member stiffnesses have been based on a plain concrete section

O:3
Column moments and reactions are given in Table 4.1.
4250
5200
5200
(Dw
in
this analysis.
Islab
2
3500
3500
/7777
/777
/7777
ANALYSIS MODEL
-198
-199
-204
123
BENDING MOMENT
ENVELOPE
(kNm)
Figures 4.15
Analysis of frame
SLABS
Table 4.1
Column moments and reactions

Max reaction
.
Support
_
(kN)
E column moments (kNm)

37.9
Max. E column moments (kNm)

37.9
End
1st interior
156.4
444.7
6.8
21.4
Panel A-13/1-2
BS 8110 3.7.4.2
EC2 does not specifically address the problem of edge column moment transfer and the provisions of BS 8110 are adopted here.
Mt,max
0.15bed 2fCU
Column A12 moment transfer

Assuming 20 mm cover and 20 mm bars in the top d,
d2
O.0
NAD
4.1.3.3(5)
= = = =
=
225
195
- 20 - 10 = 195 mm - 20 = 175 mm
E
be
300 + 300 (say) = 600 mm

E
37 N/mm2
0.15
fCU
Mt,max
x 600 x
This ought to be compared with an analysis for a loading of 1 AGk + 1.60k, which would give approximately 5% higher edge moments than the EC2
analysis results above.

Mt,max
c)'
1752
x 37 x
10-6
102 kNm
102
>
1.05
37.9
39.8 kNm
................
E
CA)
OK
Design reinforcement to sustain edge moment on 600 mm width.

E
Using ry
1.5,
0.85 and
-ys
1.15
Table 2.3
Referring to Section 13, Table 13.1:

Msd
37.9
106
bd2fck
AS
Yk
600 x 1752 x 30
CA)
0.069
0.085
bdtck
A
S
0.085 x 600 x 175 x 30

460
582 mm2
E
970 mmz/m
0.163
CA)
< 0.45 (zero redistribution)
.................
OK
2.5.3.4.2(5)
SLABS
Use T16 @ 150 mm crs. (1340 mm2/m) top at edge column
Place over width
900 mm (see Figure 4.16)
Note: This approach gives more reinforcement than is necessary.
Figure 4.16 Edge column moment transfer
Check above moment against minimum value required for punching shear.
msd
4.3.4.5.3 Eq n 4.59
Vsd
For moments about axis parallel to slab

77
edge
Table 4.9
_ 0.125 per m
=
156.4 kN
Vsd
Therefore
msd
_ 0.125 x 156.4
=
37.9
= 19.6 kNm/m
Edge moment
63.2
>
19.6 kNm/m
0.6
...............
OK
Design for msd above in region outside edge column moment transfer zone.
msd
bd2f
ck
19.6
106
0.021
1000 x 1752 x 30
Minimum steel sufficient
0t d
.6b
4 0.0015btd
=
263 mm2/m
E E
5.4.2.1.1
vk
= 0.0015 x 1000 x 175
Use T12 at 300 mm crs. (373 mm2/m) top and bottom (minimum)
Maximum spacing
3h
t>
500
500
>
300 mm
.......
OK
NAD
Table 3
5.4.3.2.1(4)
(Y)
SLABS
Column A/1 moment transfer
Assume the design forces for the frame on grid for grid 3 in proportion to their loaded widths.
Load ratio =
(4.25/2)
are directly related to those
0.41
5.2
The ratio of the edge column distribution factors for the frames is 2.0.
Msd
37.9x0.41 x2.0 =
31.1kNm
Using design approach as for column A/2:

be
300 + 320 (say)
450 mm
Mt max =
0.15
x 450 x
1752
x 37 x 10-6 = 76 kNm
>
1.05
31.1
32.7 kNm
.....................
OK
Design reinforcement to sustain edge moment on 450 mm width
Msd
31.1
106
bd2lck
AS rk
450 x 1752 x 30
0.075
0.093
bdlck
AS
0.093
x 450 x
460
175
x 30 = 478 mm2 = 1062 mm2/m
Use T16 @ 150 mm crs. (1340 mm2/m) top for a width of 600 mm
Check above moment against minimum value required for punching shear.
msd
>_
4.3.4.5.3
"f Msd
where n
= 0.5 per m for corner columns
_
Edge moment
(O"
+ 0.5
(0.41
x 156.4) say =
=
69.1
32.1 kNm/m
Eq n 4.59 Table 4.9
31.1/0.45
kNm/m
>
32.1
..........
OK
In region of slab critical for punching shear:

Msd
bd2fck
32.1
G.)
106
(A)
0.035
1000 x 1752 x 30
ASfyk
bdfck
As
0.042
0.042 x 1000
175
x 30 =
460
480 mm2/m
E
SLABS
Use T16 @ 300 mm crs. (670 mm2/m) top and bottom outside 600 mm wide moment transfer zone and over area determined in punching calculation
LOLL
The division of panels into column and middle strips is shown in Figure 4.17.
BS 8110
Figure 3.12
Although BS 8110 indicates a 2.36 m wide column strip at column 132, a 2.6 m width has been used in the following calculations. This is considered reasonable as a loaded width of 5.2 m has been taken in the analysis for grid B and grid 2.
E
1
4-25m
5.2
I1
06m
4-25m
I
=I-I
I
11.06ml
--I I
I
1
I
I I
rt ----TI I
I
1
I
1.06m
1-301M
I
I I
5-2m
I I
I
I
I
I
-I--,--T
1.06m
-#-----II
II
Figure 4.17 Assumed strip widths (arrangement symmetrical about diagonal A/1- C/3)
E E
Column 812 support moments

Analysis moment
=
=
198 kNm in both directions
Column strip
b
Msd,cs
Msd.cs
0.75
x 198 =
2600
149 kNm
BS 8110 Table 3.20
1300 x 2
mm
= 0.062
149 x 106
bd2tck
2600 x 1752 x 30
11
SLABS
Asyk
bdyk
A
s
0.076
0.076
x 2600 x 175 x 30 460
2255 mm2
E
E
Use 13T16 (2613 mm2) top in column strip. Provide 9T16 @ 150 mm crs. in central 1.3 m and 2T16 @ 300 mm crs. on either side
BS 8110
3.7.3.1
Check whether minimum moment required for punching shear has been met.
With
rt
4.3.4.5.3
C`7
-0.125 _
Table 4.9
=
Msd
" Vsd
-0.125 x 444.7
-55.6 kNm
CJ)
Eq n 4.59
This is to be carried over a width of 0.31. Since Vsd includes for a loaded width of 5.2 m, it is assumed that the larger panel width may be used.
0.31
0.3x5.2
1.56m
By inspection reinforcement (9T16 in central 1.3 m) is sufficient.
.....
OK
Middle strip (using average panel width)

Msd,ms
0.25 x 198
(4725
106
bd 2f
x
ck
2600) x 1752 x 30
0.026
d
Asyk
0.059
< 0.45
...............................
OK
2.5.3.4.2(5)
0.031
bdick
As
b
0.031
x 1000 x 175 x 30
460
354 mm2/m
E
Use T16 @ 300 mm crs. (377 mm2/m) top in middle strip

It is noted that EC2 Clause 2.5.3.3(5) would allow the use of the moment at the face of the support (subject to limits in EC2 Clause 2.5.3.4.2(7)), but this is considered more appropriate to beams or solid slabs and the peak moment over the support has been used in the above design.
gym-
_O)
Span moments
Q._0
be provided
O-0
No special provisions are required in EC2. Hence the design basis of BS 8110 is adopted for the division of moments. The same pattern of reinforcement will
in all
panels.
The column strip moments are given in Table 4.2 where

Msd,cs
0.55 Msd
<.(n
ago
Q-0
OE
0-o
SLABS
Table 4.2
Column strip span moments

Total
moment
Span
Msd
MACS
b
(m)
Msd cs
,
(kNm)
b
(kN)
(kNm)
End
1st. interior
107
58.9
67.7
2.12
27.8
123
2.36
28.6
Using the greater value:

(Msd,cs)
1
28.6
1752
103
of
2fok
x 30
0.031
As yk
0.037
bdyk
0.071
<
0.45
...............
E
OK
2.5.3.4.2(5)
As
0.037 x 175
x 30 x
103
422 mm2/m
460
Use T12 @ 250 mm crs. (452 mm2/m) bottom in column strips
Using the middle strip moment for the first interior span
4.725
2.36
2.365 m (average panel width)
Msd,ms
bd2yk
x 123 x 106 2365 x 1752 x 30

0.45
0.026
Asyk
0.031
0.059
<
0.45
bdck
................
OK
2.5.3.4.2(5)
As
b
0.031
x 175 x 30 x
460
E
103
354 mm2/m
Use T12 @ 300 mm crs. (377 mm2/m) bottom in middle strips
Minimum longitudinal reinforcement, using

E
dmax
195 mm
Lc)
0.6btd
yk
=
0.0015
4 0.0015btd
x 1000 x 195
293 mm2/m
...........
OK
SLABS
4.2.1.1.6 Punching
4.3.4
Column B12 (300 mm
x 300 mm internal column)

4.3.4.1(3) Figure 4.16
Critical perimeter located at 1.5d from face of column.
d = 185 mm (average)
For a rectangular column/wall check geometry
4.3.4.2.1(1)
C`7
Perimeter
x 300 = 1200 mm > 11d =

>
2035 mm
..
OK
length
breadth
Hence
u
Vsd
2 .................................
OK
= =
27r
1.5
x 185 + 1200 =
2944 mm
Figure 4.18
444.7 kN
Note: No reduction in this value has been taken. The applied shear per unit length:
Vsd R
4.3.4.3(4)
v,,
where
internal column
1.15
Eq n 4.50 Figure 4.21
444.7 x 103 x 1.15

Vsd
174 N/mm
2944
4.3.4.5.1
`'/
1000 x 185
Note: The amount of tensile reinforcement in two perpendicular directions

-U)
Assume plx + ply
pl/
CC/)
Shear resistance without links

VRd1
7Rdk(1.2
+ 40pi)d
Eqn 4.56
Table 4.8
TRd
=
=
0.34 N/mm2
1.6
k
pl
d =
1.6
0.185
1.415
>_
1.0
reinforcement ratio within zone 1.5d from column face

(T16 (& 150 mm crs. top each way gives 1340 mm2/m)
Pt
),
ply
> 0.015
0.0072
1340
> 0.5%.
OK
4.3.4.1(9)
2 (0.0072)
> 0.005
.....................
SLABS
Therefore
VRdl
VSd
=
=
0.34
1.415
(1.2 + 40
x 0.0072) x 185
133 N/mm
174 N/mm
>
VRdl
Therefore shear reinforcement required such that

Slab depth
>_
VRd3
>
VSd
4.3.4.3(3)
200 mm
.....................................
=
2.0 x
1
OK
4.3.4.5.2(5)
Check that applied shear does not exceed the maximum section capacity
VRd2
2 .0
VRdl
33
266
>
174 N/mm
.....
OK
NAD
Table 3
=
444.7 x 103
1200 x 185
4.3.4.5.2(1)
Shea r stress aro und colu mn perimet er
2.0 N/mm2
<_
4.9 N/m m2
...
......................
OK
NAD 6.4(d)
Desi gn shear re inforceme nt using E C2 Eqn 4.58 since

174/133
VSd /VRd1
all
1.6
NAD 6.4(d)
_
V Rd3
VRdl
EAswfyd
Eqn 4 58
.
Using type 2 deformed high yield bars as links
yd
yk
1's
460
1.15
400 N/mm2
Table 2.3
Therefore
E Asw
(174
133)
2944 400
302 mm2
Minimum reinforcement ratio

Pw,min
100% x value given in EC2 Table 5.5.
CA)
NAD Table 3
5.4.3.3(2)
0.0012 by interpolation
Table 5.5
EA sw
Pw
area within critical perimeter
r)
column area
4.3.4.5.2(4)
Denominator = (300 + 3 x 185)2

(Y)
(1.5
x 185)2(4
3002 = 575000 mm2 E
Thus EA sw,min
>_
0.0012
x 575000 =
690 mm2
it
Maximum spacing of links is determined by the ratio VSd/VRd2 where assumed that VRd2 is calculated in accordance with EC2 4.3.2.4.3(4).
is
5.4.3.3(4)
5.4.2.2(7)
119
SLABS
vsd
174 N/mm
VRa2
= (Z) v abW x 0.9d

=
0.7
Eqn 4.25 Eqn 4.21
- -k
=
-+,
0.55
200
30
fcd
20 N/mm2
1.5
2.3.3.2 Table 2.3
(Y)
E E
Therefore
vRd2
= = =
(2) x
0.55 x 20 x 0.9
x 185
916 N/mm
Vsd/VRd2
174/916
0.19
<_
0.2
Smax
0.8d > 300 mm
Eqn 5.17
= 138 mm
Longitudinal spacing > 0.75d Transverse spacing > d
NAD 6.5(f)
5.4.2.2(9)
E E
Placing shear links on 100 mm grid inside the critical perimeter.
in
700 mm square gives 48 links with 44
4.3.4.5.2(2)
By inspection the minimum preferred bar size will govern and mild steel links could be used.
fvk
250 N/mm2
0.0022 x 575000
= 1265 mm2
E
EA 9W
Table 5.5
Use 44 R8 links (2220 mm2)
Where necessary the punching shear resistance outside the shear reinforced area should be checked by considering further critical perimeters.
Check where
Vsa
4.3.4.5.2(3)
C'7
VRd,
133 N/mm
Hence
U
-VS do
444.7
103
1.15
3845 mm
VRdl
133
Therefore distance from column face
(3845
This would be approximately at the next critical perimeter taken to be at a distance 0.75d beyond the previous one. No further shear reinforcement
L()
1200)/27r = 420 mm
E
2.27d
BS 8110 Figure 3.17
required.
The tensile reinforcement (T16 @ 150 mm crs.) should extend for a full anchorage length beyond the perimeter at 420 mm from the column face.
SCE
p-,
SLABS
Column
All
(300 mm
x 300
mm corner column)
4.3.4.1(3)
Critical perimeter located at 1.5d from face of column (see Figure 4.18).
Figure 4.18 Critical perimeter at corner column

u
Vsd
= =
600 + 277x/2
0.41
= =
1035 mm
64.1 kN
R
x 156.4
Applied shear per unit length, with

VSda
VSd
1.5
4.3.4.3(4)
Figure 4.21
64.1
103
1.5
93 N/mm
E
Eqn 4.50
1035
Reinforcement within zone 1.5d from column face is T16 @ 150 mm crs. top each way (see Figure 4.19).
Figure 4.19
vRdl
VRdl
Corner column detail =

133 N/mm (as for column 8/2)
VSd
>
Therefore no shear reinforcement required
4.3.4.3(2)
SLABS
Column A12 (300 mm x 300 mm edge column)

Critical perimeter located at 1.5d from face of column.
U
= =
900 + 2777r
156.4 kN
1770 mm
Vsd
Applied shear per unit length, with a = 1.4

_
VSd
Figure 4.21
=
124 N/mm
1770
VRd1
133 N/mm (as for column B/2)
VRd1
VSd
Therefore no shear reinforcement required
4.2.1.1.7 Deflection
Control by limiting span/effective depth ratio using NAD Table
7.
For flat slabs the check should be carried out on the basis of the longer span.
For span < 8.5 m, no amendment to basic span/effective depth ratio is required.
Note 2 to NAD Table 7 states that modifications to the tabulated values for nominally reinforced concrete should not be carried out to take into account service stresses in the steel (refer to EC2: Clause 4.4.3.2(4)). However it is assumed that correction ought to be carried out for 0.15% <_ p < 0.5% but that the resulting values should not exceed those tabulated in the NAD for nominally reinforced concrete.
NAD Table 7 gives basic span/effective depth ratios which are assumed to be based on yk = 400 N/mm2.
CD'
when
fyk
F-.
460 N/mm2 and A s,req
A s,prov
Modification factor
fyk
400
Am, =
As,prov
0.87
Basic span/effective depth ratios for flat slabs are

lightly stressed
(p = 0.5%) nominally reinforced (p = 0.15%)
= =
30
41
Span reinforcement is typically T12 @ 250 mm crs. (452 mm2/m)

E
100As
_
bdmn
100
x 452
0.26%
1000 x 175
m
14f
VSda
156.4
103
1.4
Eqn 4.50
4.3.4.3(2)
4.4.3.2
4.4.3.2(5)(d)
4.4.3.2(3)
v0)
4.4.3.2(4)
NAD
Table 7 & 6.4(e)
E E
SLABS
By interpolation (p = 0.26%), basic span/effective depth ratio

max. span
37.5
OK
5200
175
29.7
< 37.5 x 0.87
dmin
.
_ 32.6........ -
4.2.1.1.8 Crack control
Use method without direct calculation.
4.4.2.3
Estimate service stress, as, under quasi-permanent loads as follows:

Gk +
4.4.2.3(3)
C'7
A
(L)
Gk
+ 0.30k
6.4 + 0.3 x 5
7.9 kN/m2
2.3.4
Ratio of quasi-permanent to ultimate design loads =

Therefore
as
7.9/16.2
0.49
Eqn 2.9(c) NAD
Table
0.49 X
X
A s,req
A s, prov
vd
<
200 X
A s,reg A s, prov
bar size using EC2 Table 4.11 or bar spacing using EC2 Table 4.12. The relevant limits are shown in Table 4.3.
Limit
Table 4.3
Crack control limits

As, reqs.prov /A
1.0
<-
0.8
Steel stress (N/mm2)
200
25
160
Bar size (mm) Bar spacing (mm)
32
Table 4.11
250
300
Table 4.12
Maximum bar size used is less than 25 mm throughout.
...........
OK
4.4.2.3(2)
Check minimum reinforcement requirement

s
ck ct,etfAct/as
Eqn 4.78
Act
AC
2
as
ct,eff
100% x fyk
460 N/mm2
E
minimum value suggested, 3 N/mm2 =

0.4,
kc
k =
0.8
Therefore
AS
>_
0.4x0.8x3x
AC
=
2 x 460
0.001A C
< 0.0015 btd (minimum flexural steel)
................
OK
CA)
Al
SLABS
4.2.1.1.9 Detailing
Consider combined requirements for flexure/shear and for punching for top steel over supports.
Column 8/2
00
For flexure/shear bars should extend for a distance d + lianet .9 2d beyond the point at which they are no longer needed (al = d = shift in moment
,k)
(f)
5.4.2.1.3 (1)&(2)
diagram).
1b
(OD
Figure
5.11
0
4
5.4.3.2.1(1)
X
yd
fbd
where
fyd
400 N/mm2
E
Eqn 5.3
Figure
For h
fbd
<_
250 mm bond conditions are good and
5.1
3.0 N/mm2
Table 5.3
Therefore
1b
400
3
33.30
c'')
lb ,ne
a a lb
cxa
A s,req
A
s,Prov
5.2.3.4.1 Eqn 5.4
For straight bars
1.0 and if A
A s,req
s,
1.0
prov
lb,net
lb
534 mm for T16 bars, say 550 mm.
Curtail alternate bars as shown in Figure 4.20.
iI
1\
d=195
195
Alternate bars curtailed at 1

and
2
550
550
550
20
1.0
195
0 5
0 5
1.0
O
571
-I --
1.5
195
571
Figure 4.20 Curtailment diagram
SLABS
Check that bars are anchored past relevant critical punching perimeter.
Earlier calculation required column strip reinforcement to extend beyond a perimeter 420 mm from column face i.e. 570 mm from grid. It is assumed sufficient to provide an anchorage tenet beyond this perimeter. Inspection of Figure 4.20 shows that this is satisfied.
(n-
4.2.1.2 Design example of a flat slab with column heads
The previous example will be used with column heads introduced at the internal columns to avoid the need for shear reinforcement.
The rest of the design is unaffected by the change.
4.2.1.2.1 Punching at column
In
13/2
(300 mm x 300 mm internal column)

vsd
the previous example it was found that column face where u = 3845 mm.
Provide a column head such that
E
1H
VRd,
at 420 mm from the
1.5hH
(see Figure 4.21).
Figure 4.22
dcrit
7
I
4300
Figure 4.21
Slab with column head
For a circular column head, assume that EC2 Equation 4.51 applies to the case where 1H = 1.5h H'
4.3.4.4(1)
Note:
It is suggested that EC2 Equation 4.55 should read 1.5dH + 0.51 dC,t = which reduces to the same as Equation 4.51 when 1H = 1.5h H"
,
Assume an effective column diameter,

To avoid
(n'
1c
300 mm
shear reinforcement:
3845 mm
612 mm 612
E
27rd,nt
dcre
1H
1.5d
0.51c =
612
(A)
1.5(185)
150 = 185 mm
Eqn 4.51
U')
125
SLABS
hH
-a
185
1.5
123 mm say 125 mm

E
c1)
E E
!c
21H
670 mm
Circular column head 125 mm below slab and 670 mm diameter is sufficient to avoid shear reinforcement
If
a square column head is preferred,
l1
l2
1 +
21H
dc
c
1.5d + 0.56
(I)
(11
12)
:51.5d +
0.6911
Eq n 4.52
L()
=
To avoid
1.5d + 0.561 + 1.121H
shear reinforcement
>-
dc.t
612 mm
lH
>_
1
1.12
(612
1.12
1.5d
0.561)
=1
hH
(612-1.5x 185-0.56x300)
= 100 mm
E
149 mm
>
149
1.5
IC
21H
600 mm
is
Square column head 100 mm below slab and 600 mm wide sufficient to avoid shear reinforcement
4.2.2 Flat slabs in laterally loaded frames

the following example, the structure used in Section 4.2.1 is considered to be unbraced in the North-South direction.
In
4.2.2.1 Design example of an unbraced flat slab frame
This example considers only the analysis of the frame on grid B, consisting of three upper storeys plus a lightweight roof structure, as shown in Figures 4.22 and 4.23.
SLABS
Figure 4.22
Plan of structure
Figure 4.23 Frame on grid B

4.2.2.1.1 Design loads
Office floors
Dead load = 6.4 kN/m2 Imposed load = 5.0 kN/m2
Roof imparts load to columns B/1 and B/5

L[)
Dead load =
Imposed load
0D)
20 kN
= 30 kN
127
SLABS
Assume characteristic wind load
1.0 kN/m2
V:
This is 90% of the value obtained from CP3: Chapter
Part
201).
NAD 4(c)
Note: The distribution of horizontal load between each frame is determined by their relative stiffness.
4.2.2.1.2 Frame classification
Determine whether sway frame or non-sway frame.
Check slenderness ratio of columns

A
in
the frame.
4.3.5.3.3 (1)&(3)
(Y)
calculation is required for those columns that resist more than 0.7 of the mean axial load. NSd,m' at any level. Service loads are used throughout (i.e.
A.3.2 A.3.2(3)
IT-
TF
It
= 1.0).
is also assumed that these are vertical loads without any lateral loads applied.
_YFFV
Figure A3.4
NSd,m
F
n
E all vertical loads at given level (under service condition)

Number of columns
E
A.3.2(1)
Consider a simple analytical model of the top floor to determine columns concerned as shown in Figure 4.24.
50 kN
50 kN
i
R1 R2
kN/m
R3
R2
R1
Figure 4.24 Load arrangement at third floor

11.4 kN/m2 11.4
x loaded width
in Section 4.2.1.1)
x 5.2 (determined
E
59.3 kN/m
3
5
R3
x 59.3 x x 5.2
4.25/8 + 50
145 kN
x 59.3 x 4.25/8 + (59.3 x 5.2/2)

=
312 kN
59.3
308 kN
100 + (18.9
NSd,m
x 59.3)
244 kN
Therefore slenderness of internal columns only needs to be checked.

Clearly, this will normally be the
X
311
0.7Nsd
171 kN
> Ri
145 kN
case for multi-bay frames unless the edge

4.3.5.3.5(2)
columns carry large cladding loads.

=
l /i
O
where
CD
128
SLABS
Aol
300
12
86.6 mm
For a horizontally loaded flat slab frame determine the stiff nesses of the frame and thus the effective lengths of the columns using half the slab stiffness. Consider the centre column.from foundation to first floor.
kA
EIcol/Icol
;
Ealb/leff 3004
12
Ib
_
=
4725 x 2253
2
x
E
lCol
3500 mm 5200 mm
E
1.0
2.5.2.2.2
0
=
ECM assumed constant

Qom)
0.675 x 109 mm4
Wi
4.3.5.3.5(1)
Eqn 4.60
= 2.24 x 109 mm4
12
leff
= =
a
Therefore k
A
2(0.675 x 109/3500)
2(2.24 x 10915200)
=
oo
= 0.5
kB
(pinned at foundation)
R
Assuming that EC2 Figure 4.27(b) is appropriate to determine

to
alco
2.15 x 3500 = 7500 mm
Figure 4.27
Hence
(fl
7500/86.6
87
A.3.2(3)
For non-sway frames

A
<_
Xrm
=
NSd
T
v
u
15
25
4.3.5.3.5(2)
VU
=
Ac cd
Ultimate design load for centre column, ignoring self-weight of column.

E
NSd
x 16.2 x
_ 30 =
1.5
5.22
1314 kN
ck
cd
20 N/mm2
yc
Eqn 4.4 Table 2.3
Therefore
1314 x 103
v
u
3002 x 20
15
0.73
17.6
25
4.3.5.3.5(2)
J"
Since
A
> 25 the structure is classified as a sway frame

E
SLABS
The analysis and design would need to follow the requirements of EC2 Clause A.3.5 to take into account the sway effects.
EC2 Clause 2.5.3.4.2(4) does not generally allow redistribution in sway frames.
-(5
fly
The method above is included to demonstrate its complexity. However, note the omission of guidance in EC2 Clause A.3.2(3) on which nomogram to use in EC2 Figure 4.27.
As an alternative means of determining the frame classification, it is suggested that an analysis as detailed in BS 5950(14) is used to demonstrate that the EC2 requirements are met for non-sway frames.
On.
CD.
07?
4.3.5.3.3(3) BS 5950:
(r)
(w3
.s.
Part
5.1.3
C/)
Assuming in the above example that the column sizes are increased such that a non-sway frame results, the following load cases need to be considered for design.
These same load cases would also be applicable to sway frames where amplified horizontal loads are introduced to take account of the sway induced forces, complying with EC2 Clause A.3.1(7) (b).
Via)
D))
0_0
1a)
4.2.2.1.3 Load cases and combinations

With the rigorous
LTG Gk +
owe
2.5.1.2
approach the 'dII''esign values are given by

Q0 + i>1 TQi wo,i Qk,i E
+
2.3.2.2 P(2)
Eq n 2.7(a)
TQ,1
where
Qk,1
>Go
= primary variable load, Qk2 = secondary variable load

E
sue'
0.7 generally
NAD Table
The yF values are given in EC2 Table 2.2.

Load cases with two variable actions (imposed and wind) are:
(a) Imposed load as primary load 1.35Gk + 1.5Qk + 1.05 Wk (b) Wind load as primary load 1.35Gk + 1.050k + 1.5 Wk
In
addition, load cases with only one variable action are:

(c) Dead load plus wind
1.OGk
(favourable) + 1.5 Wk
1.35Gk (unfavourable) + 1.51Nk
(d) Dead load plus imposed 1.35Gk + 1.50 k
For non-sensitive structures it is sufficient to consider the load (b) above without patterning the imposed loads.
(g.
cases
(a)
and
NAD 6.2(e) 2.5.1.2P(1)
The NAD allows the use of EC2 Equation 2.8(b) to give a single imposed and wind load case:
1.35Gk + 1.35Qk (all spans) + 1.35 Wk
SLABS
Final load combinations for the example given here

(i)
(ii)
(iii) (iv)
1.35Gk + 1.50 k (as Section 4.2.1.1.3) 1.OGk + 1.5Wk (single load case) 1.35Gk + 1.5Wk (single load case) 1.35Gk + 1.35Qk + 1.35Wk (single load case)
â)
L(T
4.2.2.1.4 Imperfections
2.5.1.3(4)
Consider the structure to be inclined at angle

v
100
>_
0.005 radians
Eqn 2.10
NAD
l
an
Table 3
= frame height =
10.5 m
= =
I1 (
2
+1
n
,11
where n
number of columns
Eqn 2.11
0.78
ar,Y
vred
0.78 x 0.005
0.0039 radians
Take account of imperfections using equivalent horizontal force at each floor.

AHD
2.5.1.3(6)
=
=
E V vred
total load on frame on floor
j
EV
Using 1.35Gk + 1.5Qk on each span gives
EV
Therefore
AHi
(18.9
x 5.2) x
16.2
1592 kN
1592 x 0.0039
6.2 kN per floor
Assuming the frame by virtue of its relative stiffness picks up 4.725 m width of wind load:
Wk
(4.725
3.5)
1.0
16.5 kN per floor
Therefore the effects of imperfections are smaller than the effects of design horizontal loads and their influence may be ignored in load combinations (ii) to (iv).
4.2.2.1.5 Design
2.5.1.3(8)
The design of the slab will be as described in Section 4.2.1.1.
COLUMNS
5.1
Introduction
The design of column sections from first principles using the strain compatibility method is covered.
Examples of slender column design are also presented to extend the single example given in Section 2.
5.2 Capacity check of a section by strain

5.2.1
E-0
compatibility
Introduction
Two examples are considered:
1.
Where the neutral axis at ultimate limit state lies within the section; and Where the neutral axis at ultimate limit state lies outside the section.
D))
2.
The first of these is very simple while the algebra necessary for the second is more complex. For convenience, the same section will be used for both examples. This is shown in Figure 5.1.
Assume
fk =
460 N/mm2 and
--q
Ck
30 N/mm2
350
2T32
500
f,k
30
4T25
111
fyk =460
50
Figure
5.1
Column section
5.2.2 Example
Calculate the moment that the section can sustain when combined with an axial load of 2750 kN.
5.2.2.1 Basic method
If the neutral axis is within the section, the compressive force generated by the concrete at ultimate limit state is given by
4.2.1.3.3 Figure 4.2
NRd c
0.459f kbx
COLUMNS
and the moment by

MRd,c
NRd,c(h/2
0.416x)
The strain at the more compressed face is taken as 0.0035 The procedure adopted is as follows:
(1)
Assume a value for x Calculate

NRd,c
(2)
(3)
(4) (5) (6)
Calculate the strain at each steel level

Calculate force generated by reinforcement (N Rd)
E
NRd
NRd,c
NRd,s
If NRd is not
close enough to 2750 kN, modify the value of x and return
to step (2)
(7)
If
NRd is
approximately 2750 kN, calculate

MRd,c
MRd,c
and
MRd,s
(8)
MRd
The design yield strain for the reinforcement
(D'
460
1.15
+ MRd,s
5.2.2.2 First iteration

Assumed value for x is 250 mm
NRd,c
x 200000
0.002
0.459 x 30 x 350 x 250/1000
1205 kN
0.0035
Es
top
250
x 200
0.0028
Strain >
NRd,s,
0.002; therefore
2
fs
400 N/mm2
E
= =
= =
x 804 x 400/1000 =
=
fs
643 kN
Es,mld
0 and NRd s2
-Es'top;
Es,bot
therefore
491
-400 N/mm2
=
NRd,s3
-2 x
x 400/1000
-393
kN
Hence
NRd
(.)
1205 + 643 - 393
1455 kN
This is considerably less than 2750 kN, hence x must be increased.

=
Try new value for x
250 x 2750
1455
x
473 mm
133
COLUMNS
5.2.2.3 Second iteration

NRd,
0.459 x 30 x 350 x 473/1000 =
2289 kN
NRd.s,
= = =
643 kN as before
0.0035
(473
EWid
473
250)
0.00165
fs,mid
0.00165 x 200000
=
=
330 N/mm2 324 kN

0.00017
d,s2
330 x 2 x 491/1000
0.0035
(473
Es, bot
450)
473
= =
0.00017 x 200000
= =
34 N/mm2 33 kN
NRd,s3
34 x 2 x 491/1000
Hence
C))
NRd
2289 + 643 + 324 + 33
3289 kN
This is too large, hence x should be reduced. Linear interpolation gives
250 +
2750
1455) (473
3289
5.2.2.4 Third iteration
NRd
250)
407 mm
E E
- 1455
0.459 x 30 x 350 x 407/1000 643 kN as before
1961 kN
NRd.si
=
=
Es,mid
0.0035 (407 407
250)
0.00135
Es,bot
450)
-74 N/mm2 and
NRd
s3
-73
Hence
NRd
1961
+ 643 + 265 - 73
2796 kN
CA)
This is within 2% of the given axial load of 2750 kN
VAN
fS
270 N/mm2 and
NRd,s2
265 kN
0.0035 (407 407
-0.00037
kN
..............
OK
134
COLUMNS
5.2.2.5 Moment
MRd,c MRd,sl
1961
x (250
=
0.416
x 407)/1000
158.2 kNm
643 x 0.2
0
128.6 kNm
MRd,s2
MRd,s3
73 x 0.2
14.6 kNm
MRd
158.2 + 128.6 + 14.6
301.4 kNm
5.2.3 Example 2
Calculate the moment and axial force that can be sustained by the section where the neutral axis depth is 600 mm. Note: The example has been given in this way so that repeated iterations are not necessary. These would not provide any new information to the reader.
5.2.3.1 Basic method
When the neutral axis is outside the section the ultimate compressive strain is less than 0.0035 and is given by:
The conditions in the section are shown in Figure 5.2.
Figure 5.2 Conditions in section for Example 2
c>3
0.002x
0.002 x 600
0
x
3 h17
600
x 500/7
0.0031
4.3.1.2(1) (viii) &
Figure
4.11
COLUMNS
The technique adopted for the calculation of NRd,c and MRd,c is to calculate the effect of the stress block on a depth of 600 mm and then deduct the influence of the part lying outside the section.
5.2.3.2 Concrete forces and moments
The equations for the full stress block are:
N'Rd,c
can
=
__
0.5667(1
C
'x2
R13)bxf,,k
-a1
Rd,c
Rd,c
where
h12-x(02-40
12
+6) ;and
40
0.002/E
Note:
It will be found that, the first example.
if Eu
0.0035, these equations give the values used in
The equations for the force and moment produced by the part of the stress block lying outside the section are
ANRd,c
0.5667(1
ANRd,cC
al3)(x
h)b fck
Rd,c
where
c'
a
Eb
x
=
h12
(x
- h) (8 12-4a
3a)
Eb/0.002
strain at bottom of section

Eb
From the strain diagram,
0.00051
Hence a
N'Rd,c
0.255
and a
0.645
U-)
= 0.5667(1
0.645/3) x 350 x 600 x 30/1000 = 2802 kN
c
Hence
M'Rd,c
250
600(0.6452
x 0.645 +
6)
12-4x0.645
15.9 kNm
5.67 mm
= =
5.67
x 2802/1000 =
ANRd,c
C1
0.5667 x 0.255(1-0.255/3)(600-500)350 x 30/1000 = 139 kN

(A)
600
- 250 - (600 - 500)(8 - 3 x 0.255) 12 - 4 x 0.255

136
CY)
-284 mm
E
COLUMNS
Hence
F-I:
III
AMRd,c
-139 x 284/1000
C'7
-39.4 kNm
NRd.c
= 2802 =
139
= =
2663 kN
55.3 kNm
G.)
MRd,c
15.9 + 39.4
5.2.3.3 Steel forces and moments

Strain in upper layer of bars =
0.0031
x 550
0.0028
600 This is > 0.002; hence s

NRd,sl
400 N/mm2
COD
=
=
643 kN
643 x 0.2
C')
MRd,st
128 kNm
Strain in middle layer of bars
0.0031
x 350
0.00181
600
Hence
= =
362 N/mm2
NRd,s2
355 kN,
MRd,s2
Strain in bottom layer of bars
0.0031
x
0
x 150
0.000775
600
Hence
= = =
155 N/mm2 152 kN
NRd,s3
MRd,s3
-30.4 kNm
NRd
MRd
=
=
2663 + 643 + 355 + 152

55.3 + 128
3813 kN
30.4
153 kNm
5.3 Biaxial bending capacity of a section

5.3.1
General
carry out a rigorous check of a section for biaxial bending by hand is very tedious but possible if the simplified rectangular stress block is used. It is not suggested that the example given here is a normal design procedure for common use but it could be employed in special circumstances. There would be no difficulty in developing an interactive computer program to carry out design, in this way, by trial and error.
To
(CD
137
((D
COLUMNS
5.3.2 Problem
Demonstrate that the section shown in Figure 5.3 can carry ultimate design moments of 540 and 320 kNm about the two principal axes in combination with an axial load of 3000 kN. The characteristic strength of the reinforcement is 460 N/mm2 and the concrete strength is 30 N/mm2.
500
500
40
Figure 5.3 Column section
5.3.3 Basic method

The conditions in the section are shown in Figure 5.4.
4.2.1.3.3(12)
Figure 5.4
Conditions in section
NAD
Note:
is assumed that EC20) Section 4.2.1.3.3(12) implies that should as 0.8 for biaxial bending but the NAD(') would allow 0.85.
It It
be taken
((DD
Table 3
can be seen from the diagram that the axial force provided by the concrete
NC
is given by 0.8bxc tcd

1-w
COLUMNS
The moments about the centroid of the concrete section are given by
M
where
cX
Nx
c
h
2
xc- b tan6 2+
2
btan6
x_
c
btan6
I
2xc
0NCdb3tan6
cy
=
12
These equations are valid where x' < h. When x' > h, rather simpler equations can be derived.
The location of the reinforcement is shown in Figure 5.5.
Figure 5.5
Location of reinforcement
E
The stress in a bar is given by
fs
where
200000 x 0.0035 ) z x
x,
700z
f
yd
xc
=
0.8
(b12
d')tan6
db
cos8
db
depth from top face of section to bar considered. This will be d' for top bars and h d' for bottom bars.
SCE)
The force in each bar is sAs and the moments are obtained by multiplying the forces by the distance of the bars from the centroid of the concrete section. Dimensions to the right or upwards are taken as positive.
=ND
The total moments and forces carried by the section are the sum of the steel and concrete contributions. The correct values of x and
5.3.4 Initial data
fcd
poi
have to be found by iteration.

_G)
ck
1.5
(f)
30
1.5
20 N/mm2
-..off
0.-
W-0
COLUMNS
Stress over upper 0.8 of the depth of the compression zone
ON cd
yd
= =
16 N/mm2
fYk
1.15
400 N/mm2
_O-
0, assume that the neutral axis is perpendicular to the direction of principal bending. This gives
As a first estimate of
((3
0
Try
tan-' 320
540
tan-' 0.59
0 = 301 which gives

tan0
=
0.58 and cos0
0.87
h
The limiting value of x,, is where
x' =
Hence
xc,max
=
=
(b/2)tan0
500
250 x 0.58
(<D
355 mm
This gives
Nc
355 x 500 x 16
1000
2840 kN
The reinforcement will increase this value significantly, hence xo will be less than 355 mm. Try xC = 300 mm.
CII
5.3.5 Calculation
The simplest way to carry out the calculation is by writing the equations into a spreadsheet and then adjusting the values of x. and 0 until the correct axial load and ratio MxIMY is obtained. The resulting output for the final iteration is given below. It will be seen that the result is satisfactory.
din
)c
Section breadth (b) Overall depth (h) Embedment (d')
ac,
500 500 50
Steel area
Concrete strength Steel strength
Estimate of angle (radians) Estimate of x.
Tan (angle)
8152
30 460 Average stress Design stress
16
400
0.5969026 282.5
(00
NN? (J70)
34.20
Neutral axis depth

Lever arm (x)
432.58
91.72
Cos (angle)
0.6795993 0.8270806
Bar no.
l
223.78 400.00 52.26 -311.57
-r)
Mx
91.21 163.04
MY
2 3
138.29 363.13
NOW 0)000
Wow
000 (Oh
32.29
456.07 815.20 106.50
-91.21
163.04 21.30 126.99
OC)
-21.30
126.99
-192.54
(DO
-634.97
000
Concrete Design resistances
742.80 2260.00
NSd
359.95 207.29 M
220.12
113.27
My
(+5
WON
Steel totals
Mx/Mr
3002.80
567.23
333.39
1.701432
COLUMNS
5.4 Braced slender column

5.4.1 General
The calculation of the effective length of columns has been adequately covered in Section 2. In the following example, the effective length is assumed.
5.4.2 Problem
Calculate the reinforcement required in a 400 mm x 400 mm column subjected to a design axial load of 2500 kN combined with the first order bending moments shown in Figure 5.6.
(CD
The effective length has been calculated as 8.8 m.
Ivy
4.3.5.3.5
Figure 5.6
Assume
fvk
First order moments
460 N/mm2 and
fok
30 N1mm2
E
5.4.3 Slenderness ratio

X
4.3.5.3.2
oli =
(loth) 12
(8800/400) 12
= 76.2
5.4.4 Design requirements for slenderness

Minimum slenderness ratio
PU
greater of 25 or 15/'11U
4.3.5.3.5(2)
Nsd/(Ao od)
2500 x 103/(400 x 400 x 30/1.5)

=
17.0
0.78
Hence 15/J
< 25
= 25
Therefore minimum slenderness ratio
Slenderness ratio > 25, therefore column is slender
141
COLUMNS
Critical slenderness ratio

eoi
e02
Xcrit
25(2
eo,/eo2)
4.3.5.5.3(2)
_
=
-30 x
106/(2500 x 103)
-12 mm
30 mm
75 x 106/(2500 x 103)
Hence
25(2 + 12/30) = 60
Slenderness ratio > effects
Xc,a,
therefore design is required for second order
5.4.5 Eccentricities
Additional eccentricity
4.3.5.4(3)
ea
v
vl o/2
=
=
1/200
8800/400
= 22 mm
2.5.1.3(4)
Eqn 2.10
ea
Equivalent first order eccentricity is greater of

0.6eo2 + 0.4eoi
0.6
x 30
E
E E
4.3.5.6.2
12
0.4
13.2 mm
or
0.4eo2 = 0.4
x 30
12.0 mm
Hence
ee
13.2 mm
11r
Ultimate curvature,
=
60
2K2EYd/0.9d
Assume
11r
of
400
340 mm
4.3.5.6.3(5) Eq n 4.72
2x460xK2
200000 x 1.15 x 0.9 x 340
13.07K2
x 10-6 radians
Second order eccentricity

e2
0.1 K1 a2(1 /r)
Eqn 4.69
Eq n 4.71
K,
Hence
e2
88002 x 13.07 x 10-7 K2
101.2 K2 mm
4.3.5.6.2(1)
Total eccentricity
etot
ee
ea
e2
13.2 + 22 + 101.2K2 mm
Eqn 4.65
(J)
COLUMNS
5.4.6 Iterative calculation to establish K2 and hence As

Make initial assumption of K2 This gives
etot
C/)
136.4 mm
Nlbh yk =
Mlbh2fck =
2500 x 103/(400 x 400 x 30)

(J1
0.52
0.178
136.4
x 2500 x 103/(4003 x 30) =

=
0.15
K2
d`/h
60/400
Using chart in Section 13, Figure 13.2(c) gives

(C]
0.69
Take this modified value of

Therefore
etot
K2
to recalculate etot.
13.2+22+101.2x0.69
105.0 mm
E
Hence
Mlbh2fCk =
0.137
This reduces K2 to 0.62 and MIbh2ck to 0.128

Try reduction of K2 to 0.60
This gives Mlbh2fCk
0.125 which corresponds to K2
= 0.60 in the chart.
Hence
As yk
0.38
bhf,k
As
3965 mm2
Use 4T32 and 2T25 (4200 mm2)
5.5 Slender column with biaxial bending

5.5.1 General
This example has bending dominantly about one axis and is designed to illustrate the application of EC2 Section 4.3.5.6.4.
There is some ambiguity in the drafting of this Section but the interpretation below seems reasonable.
5.5.2 Problem
Design a 400 mm square column, having an effective length of 8 m in both directions, to withstand the design ultimate first order moments shown in Figures 5.7 and 5.8 combined with a design axial load of 2000 kN. The concrete strength class is C30/37 and the reinforcement has a characteristic strength of 460 N/mm2.
(n
n.
0-0
COLUMNS
(8000/400)
=
12
69.3 in both directions
Assume dllh
0.15
Figure 5.7
First order moments

in z direction
Figure 5.8
First order moments in y direction
5.5.3 Assumptions for design of section

It is assumed that e and e in EC2 Section 4.3.5.6.4 are the first order z eccentricities at the critical section. They will, therefore, be effective values as defined by Eqns 4.66 and 4.67 in EC2 Section 4.3.5.6.2.
E E
Since
e0i
=
=
4.3.5.6.2
Eqn 4.66
ee
0.6eoz
Hence
a)"
ez
0.6x334x
2000
103
100 mm
e
Y
0.6x53x
2000
103
16 mm
0.16
4.3.5.6.4
Eqn 4.75
Hence separate checks for the two axes are permissible

ez/h
100/400
0.25 > 0.2
4.3.5.6.4(3)
A reduced value of h, therefore, must be used in carrying out a check for bending in the y direction.
The additional eccentricity in the z direction is 0.51/200 0

L!)
20 mm
E
Hence
ez + e az
=
120 mm
-vim
(eYlb)l(e,lh)
100 =
< 0.2
.L.
E E
COLUMNS
is assumed that the intention of EC2 Section 4.3.5.6.4(3) is that, using the reduced section, the applied load should just give zero stress at the least stressed face, i.e. as shown in Figure 5.9.
It
C/)
Actual section
Elastic
stress distribution
Reduced section
h'
Elastic stress distribution on reduced section
Figure 5.9
It will
Assumption for check in the y direction

lie
of
be seen that the point of application of the load must the middle third of the reduced section.
on the edge
Hence
h'
- eZ 3(200 - 120)
3(h12
eaz)
240 mm
5.5.4 Check
for bending in z direction

2
1.15
LC)
This check uses the full section dimensions

1
x 460 x 10-6
K2
x 0.9 x 340 x 0.2
13.07K2
x 10-6
4.3.5.6.3
Eqn 4.72
COLUMNS
Hence
e2
0.1
x
=
82
1
106
x 13.07K2 x 10-6 =
(Y)
83.7K2 mm
Eqn 4.69
(Since a > 35, K,

etot
in EC2 Eqn 4.69)
100 + 20 + 83.7K2 mm
4.3.5.6.2
As in the previous example, iterate using the design chart in Section 13 Figure 13.2(c) to find the appropriate value for K2 and hence ASyk/bh starting with K2 = 1. This procedure results in
fck,
Eqn 4.65
K2
= =
=
0.8
M1bh2
ck
0.194
0.417
NlbhfCk
Hence
AjA1bh f
As
ck=
0.55
0.55
x 4002 x 30/460 =
5739 mm2
E
Use 12T25 (5890 mm2)
5.5.5 Check for bending in y direction

The assumed section is shown in Figure 5.10.
r.4
Figure 5.10
Reduced section for check in y direction
e oy
16 mm
eay
e2y
=
=
eaz =
e2z
20 mm
83.7K2 mm
Hence
etot
36 + 83.7K2 mm
Nlbhf,k
2000 x
103
0.694
240 x 400 x 30
146
COLUMNS
Mlbh`fk =
0.694 x (36 + 83.7K2 )
400
0.0625 + 0.145K 2
AS yklbh
Using the same design chart as before, iterate to obtain This gives ok.
K2
K2
and hence
0.47 0.13
Mlbh2fCk =
Hence
AS
vk/bhfCk=
0.57
0.57 x 240
A3
x 400 x 30/460 =
x
3569 mm2
OK
This is less than required for z direction bending
.................
An appropriate arrangement of reinforcement is shown in Figure 5.11.
-1Z
=Z_.
z
Y
Figure
5.11
Arrangement of reinforcement
5.6 Classification of structure

5.6.1
Introduction
EC2 provides more detailed rules than BS 8110(2) for deciding whether or not a structure is braced or unbraced, or sway or non-sway. While it will normally be obvious by inspection how a structure should be classified (for example, with shear walls it will be braced and non-sway), there may be cases where direct calculation could give an advantage. The structure in the example following is chosen to illustrate the workings of EC2 in this area. It is entirely hypothetical and not necessarily practical.
coo
5.6.2 Problem
Establish an appropriate design strategy for the columns in the structure shown in Figures 5.12 and 5.13. The applied vertical loads in the lowest storey are set out in Table 5.1.
??w
gin"
(O]
T7`-
COLUMNS
a
c
300 x 300
c
11
C
')
d
750
450
YLx
400 x 300
-10-O
0
C
300 x 300
Figure 5.12
General arrangement of columns
Figure 5.13 Cross-section of structure
Table
5.1
Column sizes and loads

Column dimension (mm)
2nd moment of area

(mm x 10-6)
Service
Ultimate
(D3
Column
type
a b
c
load
load
(kN)
y
300
300 750
x
400 400 450
Iv
900
900 15820
(7)
1x
(kN)
1900
1600
2680
0 0 0
1600 5695
675
2100
0 0 0
2960
3300
Q')
4660
300
300
675
1200
1700
COLUMNS
750 x 450 columns forming the bracing elements
To
be considered as braced, the bracing elements must be sufficiently stiff to attract 90% of the horizontal load. Since all columns are the same length, this
will be so if
c,0
5.6.3 Check if structure can be considered as braced with the
5.6.3.1 y
Hence the four 750 x 450 columns can be treated as bracing elements carrying the total horizontal loads and columns type a, b and d can be designed as braced in the y direction
5.6.3.2 x direction
4 x 5695
EIbracing
_
EItot
5.6.4 Check if structure can be considered as non-sway

Classification of structures as sway or non-sway is covered
5.6.4.1 y
in
u1,--
4.3.5.3.2(1)
> 0.9
direction
EIbracing
4 x 15820
6 x 900 + 4
x 15820 +
=
2
0.904
x 675
direction
Q))
For braced structures of four or more storeys, the frame can be classified as
non-sway
htot
where
htot
Taking
0-0
6 x 1600 + 4 x 5695 + 2
x 675
0.68
Structure cannot be considered as braced in x direction
EC2 Appendix 3.
if
F I Ecmlc
_<
0.6
A3.2 Eq n A.3.2
c`')
= height of frame in metres
3.5
1
14 m
sum of
all vertical
loads taking yf =
4 x 1900 + 2 x 2100 + 4 x 3300 + 2 x 1200 = 27400 kN

ECM
sum of the stiff nesses of the bracing elements.

3.1.2.5.2
ECM
as 32000 N/mm2
Table 3.2
ECMIc
=
=
4
x 15820 x 32000 x
109
106 Nmm2
2024960 x
Nmm2
E E
COLUMNS
Hence
27400 x 103
/mm = 0.000116/mm = 0.116/m
2024960 x
109
Note: Since the height of the building is stated to be in metres, it seems reasonable to assume that m units should be used for the other factors, though this is not stated in EC2.
Hence
htot
14x0.116 =
x
o-(
1.62
>
0.6
Therefore the bracing structure is a sway frame in the y direction

5.6.4.2 x direction
CCD
For frames without bracing elements, if X < greater of 25 or 15/ Ffor all elements carrying more than 70% of the mean axial force then the structure
may be considered as non-sway.
A.3.2(3)
Mean axial force =
sum of ultimate column loads

no. of columns
4 x 2680 + 2 x 2960 + 4 x 4660 + 2 x 1700

x
NSd,m
=
700/oNsd,m
12
38680/12
3223 kN
2256 kN
Columns type d carry less than this and are therefore ignored.
i6-
Assume effective length of 400 x 300 columns is 0.8 x 3.5 = 2.8 m (i.e. value appropriate to a non-sway condition).
X
24.25 < 25
Therefore structure is non-sway
5.6.5 Discussion
The results obtained in Sections 5.6.4.1 and 5.6.4.2 above are totally illogical as the structure has been shown to be a sway structure in the stiffer direction and non-sway in the less stiff direction.
There are two possible areas where the drafting of EC2 is ambiguous and the wrong interpretation may have been made.
(1)
Eqn A.3.2 it is specifically stated that the height should be in metres. Nothing is stated about the units for C, FV and E.. Since the output from Eqn A.3.2 is non-dimensional, the statement of the units is unnecessary unless the units for F and Ec are different to that for htot. Should IC, FV and Ec be in N and mm units while htot is in m? If this were so, then the structure would be found to be 'braced' by a large margin.
In
3`T
150
(1)
,..E
-CV
COLUMNS
(2)
In A.3.2(3) it does not state whether X should be calculated assuming the columns to be sway or non-sway. In the calculation, the assumption was made that the X was a non-sway value. If a sway value had been adopted, the structure would have proved to be a sway frame by a considerable
(Q.
margin.
Clearly, clarification is required
It
if
A.3.2 is to be of any use at all.
is possible to take this question slightly further and make some estimate at what the answer should have been.
Considering the y direction, the ultimate curvature of the section of the 750 x 450 columns is
1
2x460xK2
0.2x106x1.15x0.9x700
6.35K2 2
10_6
Inspection of the design charts and levels of loading suggest K2 is likely to be about 0.6. Assuming an effective length under sway conditions of twice the actual height gives a deflection of:
0
(2
3.5)2
x6.35x0.6
19 mm
E E
10
This is an overestimate of the actual deflection. It corresponds to an eccentricity of 19/750 of the section depth or 2.5%. This must be negligible, hence, in the y direction, the structure must effectively be non-sway.
5.7 Sway structures

5.7.1
Introduction
Although EC2 gives information on how to identify a sway structure, it does not give any simple approach to their design. However, Clause A.3.5.(2) states that "the simplified methods defined in 4.3.5 may be used instead of a refined analysis, provided that the safety level required is ensured". Clause A.3.5(3) amplifies this slightly, saying that ''simplified methods may be used which introduce ....... bending moments which take account of second order effects ...... provided the average slenderness ratio in each storey does not exceed 50 or 201 v, whichever is the greater'
5'w
:(Q
Cam.
-'
-^.
Z30
EC2 Section 4.3.5 gives the 'model column' method which is developed only for non-sway cases, so it is left to the user to find a suitable method for sway frames on the basis of the Model Column Method. BS 8110 does this, so it is suggested that the provisions of 3.8.3.7 and 3.8.3.8 of BS 8110: Part 1 are adopted, but that the eccentricities are calculated using the equations in EC2.
E
5.7.2 Problem
Design columns type c in the structure considered in Section 5.6.2 assuming sway in the x direction. The column loads may be taken from Table 5.1.
The design ultimate first order moments in the columns are as shown in Figure
0
5.14.
_0)
a has been assessed from EC2 Figure 4.27(b) as
1.6 for all columns.
151
(OD
((A
OH-
-LO
O-0
COLUMNS
Mo
Column
Mo
type
a
b
C
kNm
90
110
176
25
Figure 5.14 First order moments
5.7.3 Average slenderness ratio

The slenderness ratios are shown in Table 5.2. Table 5.2
Slenderness ratios
No.
Column type
a
b
C
4
2 4
2
48.5
48.5
43.1
64.7
49.4
Mean value
(a)
Since
Xm
< 50, the simplified method may be used.

2K2
A.3.5(3)
x 460
0.0044K2
r
Hence
e2
200000 x 1.15 x 0.9d
d
106
(1.6
x
10
3.5)2
x 0.0044K2 x
x
of
13800K2
mm
of
100 14
200
2.5.1.3 Eqn 2.10
This may be multiplied by n

Where, with 12 columns
n
Eqn 2.11
(1
+ 1/12)/2
0.736
Hence
V
=
= =
0.00368
ea
etot
0.00368 x 1.6 x 3500/2

eo + ea
10.3 mm
Eqn 4.61
+ 13800K2/d
eo + 10.3 + 13800K2/d
mm
Eqn 4.65
The total eccentricities are shown in Table 5.3.
COLUMNS
Table 5.3
Column type
a
Total eccentricities
3rD
d
(mm)
350
Mo (kNm)
80
eo (mm)
30
eV
`''
bhfck
0.744
(mm)
40.3 + 39K 2
b
c
350
400
110
176
37
38
0.822
0.460
47.3 + 39K 2
48.3 +
35K
2
L()
250
25
15
0.630
25.3 + 55K 2
As in the previous examples, the design charts can be used iteratively to establish
K2
and hence
e2. This
process gives the values shown
in Table 5.4.
Table 5.4
Column type
Lateral deflections
K
z
(D3
e2
No. of
(mm)
columns
4 2 4 2
a b
0.39
0.41
15.2
16.0
0.50 0.45
Average deflection
17.5 24.8
=
17.7 mm
((')
columns will be assumed to deflect by the average value. The resulting designs are shown in Table 5.5
All
---1
BS 8110 3.8.3.8
Table 5.5
Column type
a
b
c
Summary of designs
e (mm)
M
bh2ck
N bhfck
0.744 0.822
0.460
AsfYk
A
(mmz)
bh ck
0.53 0.75
0.10
58.0 65.0
66.0
0.108 0.134
0.067
4148 5870
2201
43.0
0.090
0.630
0.38
2230
6.1
Introduction
defined as a vertical load-bearing member with a horizontal length not less than four times its thickness.
A wall is
2.5.2.1(6)
The design of walls is carried out by considering vertical strips of the wall acting as columns.
0)c
SOS
= =
6.2 Example
Design the lowest level of a 200 mm thick wall in an eight storey building supporting 250 mm thick solid slabs of 6.0 m spans on each side. The storey heights of each floor are 3.5 m, the height from foundation to the first floor being 4.5 m. The wall is fully restrained at foundation level. The building is a braced non-sway structure.
3-0(5.
6.2.1 Design data

Design axial load (NSd)
Design moment at first floor Design moment at foundation
= = 700 kN/m
5 kNm/m
Concrete strength class is C30/37.
(so
2.5 kNm/m
nom
3.1.2.4
fCk
30 N/mm2
Table 3.1
6.2.2 Assessment of slenderness

Consider a 1.0 m vertical strip of wall acting as an isolated column.
The effective height of a column
where
1COl
to
01col
4.3.5.3.5(1)
actual height of the column between centres of restraint

ko
0 is a factor depending upon the coefficients

rigidity of restraint at the column ends.
and
kR
relating to the
kn
Assuming a constant modulus of elasticity for the concrete:

E
x
12
0.23
6.67
x 10-4 x 10-3
m4
x 0.253
12
slab =
1.3
m4
k
A
(6.67x10-4+6.67x10-4)I(2x1.3x
4.5 3.5 6
10-3)
0.78
Base of wall is fully restrained.
Therefore
kB
4.3.5.3.5(1)
0.40 which is the minimum value to be used for
kA
or
kB.
Figure
4.27(a)
C))
4.3.5.3.5(1)
slab/Ieff,slab
Eqn 4.60
CA)
col /lcol
Q.-
c,,
WALLS
Hence a
= =
0.7
4500 mm
0.7
x 4500
X
=
l 0li
3150 mm
The slenderness ratio
4.3.5.3.5(2)
where
i
radius of gyration
I
1000 x 2003
12 x 1000
TA
Therefore
X
57.7 mm
E
x 200
3150
57.7
54.6
Isolated columns are considered slender where or 15/ v.
exceeds the greater of 25
Nsd
4.3.5.3.5(2)
'4ccd
=
Ac
700
M
= 200 x
E
E
103 mm2
= 1000 x 200
=
k
yC
cd
Therefore
vU
30
1.5
20 Nlmm2
700 x 103
200 x 103 x 20
0.175
Hence
15
u
15
35.9
0.175
Therefore the wall is slender
6.2.3 Design
The wall may now be designed as an isolated column in accordance with EC2(1) Clause 4.3.5.6 and as illustrated in the example in Section 5.
Although the column or wall has been classified as slender, second order effects need not be considered if the slenderness ratio X is less than the critical slenderness ratio Xcrlt.
WALLS
Xcrt
25 (2
eotleoz)
4.3.5.5.3(2) Eqn 4.62

of
where
eo1
and
relating to the axial load.

e of
eoz
are the first order eccentricities at the ends
the member
E
MSd,
N
Sd
and e o2
MSdz
N Sd
MSdt
and
MSdz
are the first order applied moments.
Therefore
25 (2
MSdi/Msdz)
where
MShc
MSdz
These moments must be given their correct algebraic signs

In
in
the equation.
this example:
25 2
Xcrit
C)7
1-2.5)
50
L(7
62.5
>
54.6
The column or wall should therefore be designed for the following minimum conditions:
4.3.5.5.3(2)
Design axial resistance (NRd)
Design resistance moment (MRd)
For this example

MRd
6.2.4 Reinforcement
The vertical reinforcement should not be less than 0.004Ao or greater than
0.04A C . Half of this reinforcement should be located at each face. 5.4.7.2(1)
The maximum spacing for the vertical bars should not exceed twice the wall thickness or 300 mm. The area of horizontal reinforcement should be at least 50% of the vertical reinforcement. The bar size should not be less than one quarter of the vertical bar size and the spacing should not exceed 300 mm. The horizontal reinforcement should be placed between the vertical reinforcement and the wall face.
((DD
te)
CT0
Nsd
Eqn 4.63
h
Nsd
20
Eqn 4.64
700 x 0'2 20
7.0
>
5.0 kNm
A
5
5.4.7.2(2) 5.4.7.2(3)
5.4.7.3
(1)-(3)
WALLS
Link reinforcement is required in walls where the design vertical reinforcement exceeds 0.02AC.
5.4.7.4(1)
normal buildings it is unlikely that walls will be classified as slender. For practical considerations they will generally not be less than 175 mm thick and the vertical load intensity will normally be relatively low. Thus the limiting slenderness ratio given by 15/ vU will be high.
_T_
In
cases where the wall is slender, only slenderness about the minor axis need be considered. Even in this case it is likely that only the minimum conditions given in EC2 Clause 4.3.5.5.3(2) Eqns 4.63 and 4.64 will apply.
In
((DD
15
can
_--.
FOUNDATIONS
7.1
Ground bearing footings

7.1.1 Pad
footing
Design a square pad footing for a 400 mm x 400 mm column carrying a service load of 1100 kN, 50% of this being imposed load with appropriate live load reduction. The allowable bearing pressure of the soil is 200 kN/m2.
7.1.1.1 Base size
With 500 mm deep base, resultant bearing pressure
Area of base required
Use 2.5 m x 2.5 m x 0.5 m deep base 7.1.1.2
Durability
ENV 206

For cement content and w/c ratio refer to ENV 206 Table
3(6).
Table NA.1
NAD
Minimum cover to reinforcement is 30 mm.
For concrete cast against blinding layer, minimum cover > 40 mm.
Use 75 mm nominal cover bottom and sides
E E
Table 6
4.1.3.3(9)
7.1.1.3 Materials Type 2 deformed reinforcement with yk
460 N/mm2
E
NAD 6.3(a)
Concrete strength grade C30/37 with maximum aggregate size 20 mm

7.1.1.4 Loading
Ultimate column load
7.1.1.5 Flexural design =
1.35Gk + 1.50k
1570 kN
Eqn 2.8(a) Table 2.2
Critical section taken at face of column
2.5.3.3(5)
Msd
8x2.5
CC)
346 kN m
Assuming 20 mm bars
dave
500 - 75 - 20
405
mm
Figure 4.4
Using rectangular concrete stress diagram

cd
Ck
30
1.5
20 N/mm2
1570 (2.5
0.4)2
'Y'
Eqn 4.4 Table 2.3
cd
0.85 x 20
17 N/mm2
Zoo
For components in non-aggressive soil and/or water, exposure class is 2(a).
LO[)
200
0.5
x 24 = 188 kN/m2
=
1100
5.85 m2
188
Table 4.1
FOUNDATIONS
For reinforcement
fyd
vk
460
1.15
400 N/mm2
-Y'
2.2.3.2P(1) Table 2.3

2.5.3.4.2(5)
For the design of C30/37 concrete members without any redistribution of

E
moments, neutral axis depth factor
x d
<_
0.45
Using the design tables for singly reinforced beams

Msd
346 x
0-2
106
0.028
bd2Ck
2500 x 4052 x 30
d
A!yk
0.063
< 0.45
................................
OK
bd fck
Hence AS
0.033
0.033 x 2500 x 405 x
30
460
2179 mm2
Minimum longitudinal reinforcement

E
0.6btd 0.0013btd 460 =

0.0015
5.4.3.2.1 5.4.2.1.1
0.0015btd
x 2500 x 405 =
2179 mm2
1519 mm2
7T20 gives 2198
>
..............................
20
OK
Bar crs.
2500
2(75)
6
388 mm
Maximum spacing
3h
> 500
500
> 388 mm
.......
OK
NAD Table 3
5.4.3.2.1(4)
7T20 (EW) are sufficient for flexural design. Additional checks for punching and crack control require 9T20 (EM refer to Sections 7.1.1.7 and 7.1.1.8.
Use 9T20 (EW)
7.1.1.6 Shear
Minimum shear reinforcement may be omitted in slabs having adequate provision for the transverse distribution of loads. Treating the pad as a slab, therefore, no shear reinforcement is required if Vsd <_ VRdt.
4.3.2.1P(2)
4.3.2.2(2)
FOUNDATIONS
Shear force at critical section, distance d from face

C.)
of
Vsd
1570
2.5
---2.5
2
column
4.3.2.2(10)
(J1
0.4
2
0.405)
405 kN
Shear resistance,
VRdl
VRd1,
with zero axial load
4.3.2.3
1.195
(It
D))
(11 )
'yd
fbd
Eqn 5.3
L.()
For bars in the bottom half of a pour, good bond may be assumed. Hence for
E
5.2.2.1(2)
0<_32mm
fbd
3.0 N/mm2
Table 5.3
33.30
lb
x 430 =
For anchorage in tension

0.3
lb,min
lb
4 100
.9 100
mm
Eqn 5.5
100
200 mm
Actual distance from critical section to end of bar

2500
2
400 - 405 - 75
2
570
mm
< d +
lb,min
405 + 200
605 mm
160
G.)
C/)
= =
IRd
k(1.2 + 40pl) bwd
Eqn 4.18
Table 4.8
1.0
TRd
0.34 N/mm2
1.6-d
To
calculate Asl, area of tension reinforcement extending d +
critical section, determine

As,reg
-rl
lb,net
beyond
Ib,net
Clalb
Eq n 5.4
LC)
A s, prov
1b.min
For curved bars with concrete side cover of at least 30
5.2.3.4.1(1)
0.7
,-TI
elm
FOUNDATIONS
Therefore
Asp
VRd,
0.34 x 1.2 x 1.195 x 2500 x 405 x 10-3 = 493 kN
>
VSd
405 kN
Check that
VSd
>
0.7
VRd2
to avoid crushing of compression struts.
- k f
0.55
.9
0.5 N/mm2
Eq n 4.20
E E
200
u dbW0.9d
0.55 x 20 x 2500 x 0.9 x 405

2
x 10-3
VRd2
Eqn 4.19
5012 >
405 kN
..............................
OK
7.1.1.7 Punching
Length of base from face of column

a
1050 mm
1050
>
Figure 4.16
hf
400
By definition the foundation should be
considered as a slab.
4.3.4.1 P(4)
Critical perimeter at 1.5d from face of column should be checked for punching.
U
27r (1.5
x 405) + 4 x 400
E
5417 mm
& 4.3.4.2.2
In
foundations the applied shear may be reduced to allow for the soil reaction
E
within the critical perimeter.
4.3.4.1(5)
Enclosed area
Total width
= =
= =
(3
1.5
x 405) + 400 x 405
1615 mm
Corner radius
Area
VSd
608 mm
1.6152
(4
- ir) 0.6082
(,O
2.29 m2 995 kN
1570
(1
2.29
2.5
The applied shear per unit length

VSd
4.3.4.3(4)
VSd
1.0 for pads with no
eccentricity of load
FOUNDATIONS
Therefore
995 x 103
VSd
184 N/mm
5417
The amount of tensile reinforcement in two perpendicular directions should be greater than 0.5%. This is assumed to require prx + pry > 0.5%.
Using 9T20 (EW),
For B1
AS
4.3.4.1(9)
2830 mm2 (EW)
dX
100A S
415 mm
E
0.27%
bdx
For B2
dy
100A S
395 mm
0.28%
bd
y
0.27% + 0.28%
0.55%
>
0.5%
........................
OK
Punching resistance for a slab without shear reinforcement

VRd1
7Rdk(1.2
+ 40pr)d
4.3.4.5
(")
The equation produces similar values to the shear check performed above
VRd1
0.34
Check the stress at the perimeter of the column

Vsdlud
<_
1.195
x 1.2 x 405
197
>
184 N/mm
NAD 6.4(d)
0.90.
0.90FRO
4.9 N/mm2
d
u
405 mm
4 x 400
1600 mm
1570 x 103
Stress =
405 x 1600
2.4
<
4.9 N/mm2
............
OK
E E
7.1.1.8 Crack
control
4.4.2.3 4.4.2.3(3) 2.2.2.3P(2)
(Y?
Estimate service stress in reinforcement under quasi-permanent loads using the following approximation
Gk +
2Qk
Gk + 0.30k
550 + 0.3 x 550
715 kN
2.3.4
Eqn 2.9(c)
&
NAD
1
Table
162
FOUNDATIONS
Hence quasi-permanent load/factored load =
715/1570
0.46
and estimated service stress

0.46
yd
x
A
S'feg
s,
0.46
x 400 x
2179
= 142 N/mm2
prov
Either limit bar size using EC2 Table 4.110) or bar spacing using EC2 Table
4.12.
(D0
2830
4.4.2.3(2)
20
<
32 mm
...............................
=
OK
This has been chosen to comply with Table 4.12 as well. Using 9T20 (EW) bar spacing
290
<
300 mm
............
OK
4.4.2.3(2)
4.4.2.2

As
>_
kckct,eff Act/as
Eq n 4.78
For Act it is considered conservative to use (h/2)b

Us
100% x
fYk
460 N/mm2
For cteff use minimum tensile strength suggested by EC2

kc
3 N/mm2
0.4 for bending
For k interpolate
a value for h =
50 cm from values given
k
Therefore
As,req As,prov
0.5 + 0.3(80
50)/(80
30)
0.68
=
=
0.4
CC)
x 0.68 x
(V)
x 250 x 2500/460 =
1109 mm2
2830
>
1109
mm2 .......................... OK
7.1.1.9 Reinforcement detailing
Check that flexural reinforcement extends beyond critical section for bending for a distance >_ d + lb,net
+
lb
5.4.3.2.1(1)
& 5.4.2.1.3
33.30 =
667 mm
Assuming straight bar without end hook
Ib, net
1.0x667x2179
lb,net
514 mm
Eqn 5.4
2830 =
919 mm
of
405 + 514
2500
2
Actual distance =
400
75
975
>
919 mm
.....
OK
FOUNDATIONS
500
75 cover
I
Figure
7.1
9T20
2500
- 300EW
Detail of reinforcement in pad footing
7.1.2 Combined
footing
Design a combined footing supporting one exterior and one interior column.
An exterior column, 600 mm x 450 mm, with service loads of 760 kN (dead) and 580 kN (imposed) and an interior column, 600 mm x 600 mm, with service loads of 1110 kN (dead) and 890 kN (imposed) are to be supported on a
rectangular footing that cannot protrude beyond the outer face of the exterior column. The columns are spaced at 5.5 m centres and positioned as shown
in
Figure 7.2.
(AD
The allowable bearing pressure is 175 kN/m2, and because of site constraints, the depth of the footing is limited to 750 mm.
_-j
Figure 7.2
Plan of combined footing
7.1.2.1 Base size
(J)
Service loads
Gk
+0
Column A: 1340 kN and Column B: 2000 kN

Distance to centroid of loads from LH end
0.3 +
2000 x 5.5
3340
3.593 m
E
164
q.0
FOUNDATIONS
For uniform distribution of load under base
Length of base
=
((DD
x 3.593 say 7.2 m

E
With 750 mm deep base, resultant bearing pressure
175
0.75 x 24
=
=
157 kN/m2
Width of base required
=
7.2
3340
x 157
2.96
say3.0m
Use 7.2 m x 3.0 m x 0.75 m deep base
7.1.2.2 Durability
For ground conditions other than non-aggressive soils, particular attention is needed to the provisions in ENV 206 and the National Foreword and Annex to that document for the country in which the concrete is required. In the UK it should be noted that the use of ISO 9690(15) and ENV 206 may not comply with the current British Standard, BS 8110: Part 1: 1985 Table 6.1(2) where
(On
(n.
sulphates are present.

Class 2(a) has been adopted for this design.
For cement content and w/c ratio refer to ENV 206 Table 3.
c(
Table 4.1
ENV 206
Table NA.1
NAD

For concrete cast against blinding layer, minimum cover > 40 mm.
However,
of
it is suggested that nominal cover > 40 mm the above clause.
(ti
Use 75 mm nominal cover bottom and sides and 35 mm top
7.1.2.3 Materials
Type 2 deformed reinforcement with
fYk
Concrete strength grade C30/37 with maximum aggregate size 20 mm

7.1.2.4 Loading
Ultimate column loads
Column A: 1896 kN and Column B: 2834 kN

Distance to centroid of loads from LH end
0.3 +
i.e.
virtually at centre of 7.2 m long base

= 4730
7.2
Assume uniform net pressure
((DD
See Figures 7.3, 7.4 and diagrams respectively.
Table 6
4.1.3.3(9)
is a sufficient interpretation
2834 x 5.5
4730
7.5 for loading,
a))
E E
460 N/mm2
NAD 6.3(a)
1.35Gk + 1.50k
Eqn 2.8(a)
Table 2.2
3.595 m
657 kN/m
219 kN/m2
shear force and bending moment
FOUNDATIONS
2834 kN
(/3160 kN/m
4723 kN/m
f t t-"
Fib
657 kN/m
4.9
1.1m
.l
Figure 7.3
Loading diagram
Figure 7.5
Bending moment diagram
FOUNDATIONS
7.1.2.5 Flexural design

7.1.2.5.1
Longitudinal direction
top steel
Mid-span
MSd
= =
2167 kNm
750
35
20
32/2
679 say 675 mm

E
Using the design tables for singly reinforced beams

Mc14
2167 x 106
0.053
bd2fCk
3000 x 6752 x 30
d
ASfyk
0.123 < 0.45 limit with zero redistribution
OK
2.5.3.4.2(5)
0.064
bdf,k
AS 0.064 x 3000 x 675 x
30
= 8452 mm2 = 2818 mm2/m

E
460
E
E
Use 12T32 @ 250 mm crs. (3217 mm2/m)
Continue bars to RH end of base to act as hangers for links.
awe
Particular attention is drawn to the clauses for bar sizes larger than 32 mm. These clauses are restrictive about laps and anchorages, such that designers may need to resort to groups of smaller bars instead.
5.2.6.3P(1) & P(2)
Maximum spacing
3h > 500
500 > 250 mm

E
.........
OK
NAD
Table 3
7.1.2.5.2 Longitudinal direction
At column face
MSd
_Z)
S
bottom steel
5.4.3.2.1(4)
398 kNm
750 - 75 - 10
of
665
mm
E
Mlz
398 x
(7N
106
0.010
bd2fck
ASfyk
3000 x 6652 x 30
0.012
bdck
A
0.012 x 3000 x 665
30
460
= 1561 mm2 = 520 mm2/m
For minimum steel As,m.n
0.0015btd
998 mm2/m
E
5.4.2.1.1
Use 12T20 @ 250 mm crs. (1258 mm2/m)
(.J
.........
FOUNDATIONS
7.1.2.5.3 Transverse direction
bottom steel
Msd
1.5
0.45
2
219
178 kNm/m
Minimum steel governs.

Use T20 @ 250 mm crs. (1258 mm2/m)
7.1.2.6 Shear Critical shear section at distance d from face of column

4.3.2.2(10)
Column
Vsd
interior side
= =
=
1717
-T
0.675 x 657
1273 kN
VRdl
TRd
k(1.2 + 40pr)bwd
'Rd
0.34 N/mm2
1.6
k
P,
4.3.2.3 Eqn 4.18 Table 4.8

C`7
.9
1.0
1.0
0.00476
Ensure bars are continued sufficiently.

VRdi
957 kN
VRdt
VSd
((DD
>
Therefore shear reinforcement required.
Shear capacity with links

((DD
VRd3
Vcd
VRdl
+ Vwd
4.3.2.4.3
Eqn 4.22
Therefore
(DD
>-
1273
957
316 kN
A sw
d
0.9dfywd
Eqn 4.23
d =
675 mm
C11
fywd
400 N/mm2,
316 x 103
Asw
>_
0.9
x 675 x 400
= 1.30 mm2/mm
E
Where shear reinforcement is required, the minimum amount is 100% of the

E
NAD
EC2 Table 5.5 value.

With = 460, =
Table 3
5.4.3.3(2)
fyk
Pwm
Table 5.5
168
FOUNDATIONS
For links
PW
AIsb
SW
Eqn 5.16
0.0012
x 3000 =
3.6
> 1.30 mm2/mm
Therefore minimum links govern.
Determine link spacing, using EC2 Eqn 5.17-19.

(1)
VRd2
= =
ofd bW(0.9 d)12

0.55 x 20 x 3000 x 0.9 x 675 x 10-3/2 = 10020 kN
Eqn 4.25
Vsd/VRd2
1273/10020
0.13
< 0.2
Use EC2 Eqn 5.17 to determine link spacing.

smax
0.8d (Note: 300 mm limit in Eqn 5.17 does not apply to slabs)
5.4.3.3(4)
P-
0.75d
506 mm
NAD 6.5(f)
Transverse spacing of legs across section

.
5.4.2.2(9)
<_
d or 800 mm
E
E
675 mm
E
Vsd
Use 12 legs T10 @ 250 mm crs. in each direction where
>
VRd,
A SW
s
12
x 78.5
=
250
3.77
>
3.6 mm2/mm
E
...........
OK
Check diagonal crack control

Vd
Vsd
5.4.2.2(10)
=
=
VRdl
957 kN
1273 kN (max.)
Vsd
<
3V
No further check required.
4.4.2.3(5)
VRdl
Distances to where
xa
Vsd
from face of columns A and B

E
1502 - 957
= 657
0.830 m
E
xb
1.157 m
Check shear in areas where bottom steel is in tension and

P,
0.0015 (min. steel)
(I1
FOUNDATIONS
VRdl
0.34(1.2 + 0.06)3000
x 665 x 10-3 = 854 > 723 kN .. OK
No links required at RH end of base
(C]
In
orthogonal direction, shear at d from column face
219(3.0-0.45-0.6x2)
2
148 kN/m
From above
VRdl
3.0
854
284
>
148 kN/m ...................
OK
No links required in orthogonal direction
7.1.2.7 Punching
Length of one side of critical perimeter at 1.5d from face of column
E
4.3.4.1P(4) &
x 690 + 600 =
2670 mm
=
4.3.4.2.2
This extends almost the full width of the base
3000 mm
Hence it is sufficient just to check line shear as above and shear around perimeter of column face, where
,S-
Vsdlud
The shear stress at the column face perimeter with d = 675 mm is less than 4.9 N/mm2 in both cases (see Table 7.1) OK
ill
<_
0.90
0.90 x
4.9 N/mm2
(n'
NAD 6.4(d)
.......................
Load (kN) 1896 Stress (N/mm2)
1.7
Table
7.1
Punching shear at column face

Perimeter
(mm)
Column
A
B
1650
2400
2834
1.75
7.1.2.8 Crack control

4.4.2.3
Estimate service stress in reinforcement under quasi-permanent loads, using the following approximation:
Gk +
4.4.2.3(3)
02Qk
Gk
+ 0.3Qk
in
The relevant loads are shown

Table 7.2
Load
Gk + 0.30k (kN)
Table 7.2.
Column loads for cracking check

Column A
934
Column B
1377
1.35Gk + 1.5Qk
(M)
1896 0.49
2834
0.48
Ratio
170
FOUNDATIONS
Estimated steel stress =
0.49
x yd x
As,req
A s. prov
0.49
x 400 x
8452
12 x 804
172 N/mm2
Either limit bar size using EC2 Table 4.11 or bar spacing using Table 4.12.
4.4.2.3(2)
In
Table 4.11 bar size

(c1
<_
<_
25 mm > 32 mm used.
285 mm in pure flexure > 250 mm used.
E
In Table 4.12 spacing
OK
4.4.2.3(2) 4.4.2.2(3) Eqn 4.78

As
'-
kckfct,0 ct/as
For Act it is considered conservative to use (hl2)b.

as
LL
.-U
1000/0
fyk
460 N/mm2
E
E
For
fct,eff
use minimum tensile strength suggested in EC2, 3 N/mm2.
kc
0.4 for bending
For k interpolate a value for h = 75 cm, which gives k = 0.53.
Therefore
As
>_
0.4
x 0.53 x 3 x 750 x 3000/(2 x 460) = 1555 mm2
12T32 gives As
> 1555 mm2

E
(Y)
.................................
LH
o')
OK
7.1.2.9 Detailing
Check bar achorage detail at

((D
end.
5.4.2.1.4(2)
The anchorage should be capable of resisting a tensile force
F
with
al
VSdaild
d
Vsd
5.4.3.2.1(1)
Fs
U)-
Vsd
column reaction
1896 kN
5.2.2.1 &
5.2.2.2
The bond strength for poor conditions in the top of the pour
=
fbd
1b
0.7
x Table 5.3 value
0.7
x 3 =
2.1 N/mm2
(014)(fyd/fbd)
47.60
= 1524 mm
Eqn 5.3
Continuing all T32 bars to end

A s. prov
As,req
=
=
9650 mm2
Vsdl yd
1896 x 1031400
4740 mm2
CA)
FOUNDATIONS
Hence required anchorage, (3
)lb,net
at a direct support
=
Figure 5.12
(3) lb x 4740/9650
Anchorage up to face of column =
The anchorage may be increased to the end of the bar.
500 mm >
0.31b
..........
.....
OK OK
600
if
75 =
525 mm
lb,net'
preferred, by providing a bend at

5.2.3.3
5.4.3.2.1
The requirement for transverse reinforcement along the anchorage length does not apply at a direct support.
.--U
Secondary reinforcement ratio for top steel

p2
0-0
?
=
Al
>_
0.2p1
0.2 x 0.00476
0.00095
750 - 35 - 10
705
mm
As
670 mm2/m
Use T16 @ 250 mm crs. (804 mm2/m) transversely in top

Spacing
<_
500
mm
....................................
7.6.
OK
The reinforcement details are shown in Figure
Figure 7.6
Detail of reinforcement in combined footing
7.2 Pilecap design

7.2.1 Pilecap design example using
A four-pile
truss analogy
group supports a 500 mm square column which carries a factored load of 2800 kN. The piles are 450 mm in diameter and spaced at 1350 mm
centres.
7.2.1.1 Pilecap size
Assume a pilecap depth of 800 mm. Allow the pilecap to extend 150 mm beyond the edge of the piles, to give a base 2.1 m square as shown in Figure 7.7.
ELL
Use 2.1 m x 2.1 m x 0.8 m deep pilecap
172
FOUNDATIONS
Figure 7.7
7.2.1.2 Durability
Pilecap layout
For components in non-aggressive soil and/or water, exposure class is 2(a).

For cement content and w/c ratio refer to ENV 206 Table 3.

NAD Table 6

Use 100 mm nominal bottom cover over piles and 50 mm sides
7.2.1.3 Materials

((DD
fYk
= 460 N/mm2
(/)
NAD 6.3(a)
Concrete strength grade C30/37 with maximum aggregate size 20 mm.

7.2.1.4 Element classification
A
t.1
beam whose span is less than twice its overall depth is considered a deep beam.
(ti
2.5.2.1(2)
2.5.2.2.2
-00
With the effective span,

leff
leff,
taken to the centre of the piles:
1350
800
1.7 E
< 2
Therefore treat as deep beam for analysis.

7.2.1.5 Loading Ultimate column load
=
=
2800 kN
0.8
Pilecap (self-weight) Ultimate pilecap load

7.2.1.6 Design
x 25 =
20 kN/m2
= 1.35 x 20 = 27 kN/m2
Eqn 2.8(a)
Deep beams under a concentrated load may be designed using a strut and
tie model.
2.5.3.7.3
173
('`)
_-J
FOUNDATIONS
Use a model with a node at the centre of the loaded area and lower nodes over the centre lines of the piles at the level of the tension reinforcement together with an effective column load to account for the pilecap weight of, for example:
Nsd
BS 8110
3.11.4.1
=
=
2800 + 1.352 x 27
800
=
=
2850 kN
675 mm
dave
100
25
The total tensile force in each direction

Nsd
Fsd
left
2850 x 1350
4 x 675
1425 kN
4d
For reinforcement
yk
yd
460
1.15
400 N/mm2
OZ)
ys
2.2.3.2P(1) Table 2.3
A s, req
1425 x 103
3563 mm2
400
There are no specific requirements within EC2 for the distribution of the calculated reinforcement. The provisions of BS 8110: Part 1: Clause 3.11.4.2 are adopted in this example.
With piles spaced at 3 times the diameter, the reinforcement may be uniformly
distributed.
Use 8T25 at 275 mm crs. (3928 mm2)
E
Maximum spacing
E E
0.6b`d
3h > 500
500 > 275 mm

l17
..........
..
OK
NAD
Table 3
Minimum A s =
I Yk
K 0 0015 bt d = 0 0015 x 2100 x 675 = 2127 mm 2

. .
OK
5.4.3.2.1(4) 5.4.2.1.1(1)
The reinforcement details are shown in Figure

LL
C.)
7.8.
Figure 7.8
Details of pilecap reinforcement
FOUNDATIONS
7.2.1.7 Shear
Only in elements such as slabs may shear reinforcement be omitted where
4.3.2.1P(2)
calculations justify.
Despite the classification for the pilecap given above, in line with common UK practice, it is not intended to provide shear reinforcement when Vsd < VRd1.
Take the critical section for shear to be located at 20% of the pile diameter into the piles, extending the full width of the pilecap.
E
4.3.2.2(2)
BS 8110
Figure 3.23
Distance from centre of loaded area

x
= 1350/2
0.3
x 450
540 mm
Shear resistance
VRd1
=
= =
TRd
k(1.2 + 40p)bwd
TRd
0.34 N/mmz
1.6
4.3.2.3 Eqn 4.18 Table 4.8

1.0
k
pl
1.0
3928
2100
x 675
0.00277
All of tension steel is to continue sufficiently past critical section; check when detailing.
VRd1
= 0.34(1.2 + 40 x 0.00277) 2100 x 675 x 10-3 = 632 kN

4.3.2.2(5)
Consider enhanced resistance close to the supports 2.5d

0
X
L'2
2.5
x 675
540
(Vii
3.125
4.3.2.2(9)
1.0
<_
<_
5.0
..................................
z
Shear force
2850
Vsd
_
2
=
=
1425 kN
3.125
<
0VRd1
x 632
1975 kN
it is
Having taken into account the increased shear strength close to the supports, necessary to ensure that the reinforcement is properly anchored.
C7)
0
0
OK
4.3.2.2(11)
this case all reinforcement will extend to centre line of pile and be anchored beyond that position OK
In
.
ac)
.......................................
it is
7.2.1.8 Punching
Piles fall within 1.5d perimeter from column face, check shear around column perimeter, where
thus only necessary to
4.3.4.2.2(1)
Stress
<_
0.9
0.9
x 13-0 =
4,9 N/mm2
NAD 6.4(d)
4.3.2.2(5)
No enhancement of this value is permitted.
FOUNDATIONS
2800 x
Stress =
103
4x500x675
2.1
<
4.9 N/mm2
.........
OK
7.2.1.9 Crack control

4.4.2.3
Estimate service stress in reinforcement under quasi-permanent loads using

following method
Gk + 020k
4.4.2.3(3)
Gk + 0.30k
For this example the column loads, Gk
1200 kN and
0k
785 kN
Hence the quasi-permanent load/factored load =

Estimated steel stress
= 0.51 x yd x
1200 + 0.3 x 785
As req
2800
= 0.51
0.51
x 400 x
3563
185 N/mm2
A s Pov
3928 4.4.2.3(2)
Either limit bar size to EC2 Table 4.11 value or bar spacing to EC2 Table 4.12 value.
From Table 4.11 bar size
From Table 4.12 bar spacing
< 270 mm
<
275 mm used E
4.4.2.3(2) 4.4.2.2(3)

As
>_
<_
25 mm
25 mm used
...........
OK
Act/as kc WOO
Eq n 4.78
(h/2)b.
For Act it is considered conservative to use

QS
100% x yk
460 N/mm2
For
ct,eff
use minimum tensile strength suggested by EC2, 3 N/mm2.
kc
0.4 for bending

0.5 for h
>_
k Therefore
As
AS.
80 cm
1096 mm2
Prov
3928 mm
OK
7.2.1.10 Detailing
The reinforcement corresponding to the ties in the model should be fully anchored beyond the nodes, i.e., past the centres of piles.
lb
5.4.5(1)
4 l0/
yd
fna
5.2.2.3(2)
176
FOUNDATIONS
For bars in bottom half of a pour, good bond may be assumed.
5.2.2.1
Hence
fbd
3.0 N/mm2
E
(0
<_
32 mm)
Table 5.3
25 x 400
lb
LC)
834 mm
E E
4 x 3
Zip
lb, net
b,min
Using bobbed reinforcement, as
0.7
lb,net
0.7
x 834 x
3563 3928
530 mm
E
Length beyond centre of pile allowing for end cover
375
50
325
<
530 mm
Bars cannot be anchored in manner shown in EC2 Figure 5.2. Use bent-up bars with large radius bend and anchorage length
lb
A s,reg
756 mm
A s,prov
Diameter of bends can be obtained from NAD Table 80). Assume that the limits given for minimum cover in the table are equally applicable to bar centres.
For T25 @ 275 mm crs., bend diameter
bend radius
NAD
Table 8
=
=
130,
(13/2) x 25
C/)
165 mm
The use of NAD Table 8 is conservative, as it is based on full stress in the bars at the bend. The values given appear to be consistent with BS 8110: Part 1: Clause 3.12.8.25 using fcu = 30 N/mm2.
.in
(3D
For concrete placed in the UK, it should be possible to demonstrate compliance with EC2 Clause 5.2.1.2P(1) by using the BS 8110 Clause above, with the result
that smaller diameter bends may be used.

For the edge bars, which have a minimum cover > 30 Table 8 gives 200 mm radius bend (see Figure 7.9).
(77
0-0
0--
75 mm, NAD
The requirement for transverse reinforcement along the anchorage length does not apply at a direct support.
Provide bars to act as horizontal links, such as 4T16 @ 150 mm crs.
0_0
CJ)
1(n
CO)
LT-
FOUNDATIONS
Figure 7.9
Detail of bent-up bars
7.2.2 Pilecap design example using bending theory

determine the bottom reinforcement. The shear force diagram is shown in Figure 7.10.
CSC
Take the pilecap from the preceding example but use bending theory to
178
FOUNDATIONS
7.2.2.1 Flexural reinforcement
Msd
= = =
1425 ( 0 425 +
.
0.25)
2
784 kN m
E
z
AS
0.975d
658 mm
2979 mm2
Because of the difference in modelling, this is less reinforcement than the previous example.
7.2.2.2 Detailing
At of
an end support, the anchorage of bottom reinforcement needs to be capable resisting a force:
F
Nsd
U).
5.4.2.1.4(2)
= =
Vsdaild +
Nsd
Eqn 5.15
0 in this case
with
al
d
Vsd
5.4.3.2.1(1)
Fs
4 s, req
1425 kN
1425
x 103/400
3563 mm2
This is identical to the area of steel required in the previous example.

Use 8T25 as before (3928 mm2)
Using the same detail of bobbed bars

Ib,net
+L-'
530 mm
EC2 Figure 5.12(a) applies and is taken to require an anchorage length, (2/3)1b,net = 353 mm past the line of contact between the beam and its
support.
Using a position 20% into the pile to represent the line of contact, the length available for anchorage
(3D
=
=
0.3
x pile dia. + 375

x 450 + 375
50
G.)
cover
= 460
0.3
>
353 mm
....
OK
8SPECIAL DETAILS
8.1
Corbels
8.1.1
Introduction
Consider a corbel designed to carry a vertical ultimate design load of 400 kN with the line of action of the load 200 mm from the face of the support (wall, column etc), as shown in Figure 8.1.
2.5.3.7.2
FV =
400 kN
QC =
200
d hc
b
d
= 300
=
465
500
{/'1
hc =
Figure
8.1
Corbel dimensions
8.1.2 Materials
fck
fYk
= =
30 N/mm2 (concrete strength class C30/37) 460 N/mm2 (characteristic yield strength)
8.1.3 Design
8.1.3.1 Check overall depth
of corbel
2.5.3.7.2(5) 4.3.2.3
an increased tie force and consequent detailing problems. The value of 7-Rd in T the expression for VRdl (EC2 Eqn 4.180)) may be modified by the factor a defined in EC2 Clause 4.3.2.2(9).
By inspection a will be a minimum when x will also be a minimum. VRd,
((DD
Conservatively, the maximum shear in the corbel should not exceed The VRd1. depth of the corbel could be reduced by putting F <_ V1Rd2 but this would give
c,0
Now
VRd,
C'2
[aTRdk(1.2
+ 40pl) + 0.15Qcp]bwd
<_
(OD
C`)
ac in EC2 Eqn 4.17.
Hence
2.5d/x with 1.0

2.5 x 465
200
Eqn 4.18
<_
5.0
Eqn 4.17
5.81
<_
5.0
T 7*
Rd
= =
0.34 N/mm2
1.6
Table 4.8
1
d 4
1.14 m
p, is assumed to be 0.006 (4T16)
SPECIAL DETAILS
No provision has been made to limit horizontal forces at the support; therefore a minimum horizontal force (H,) acting at the bearing area should be assumed. This is given by
H
=
2.5.3.7.2(4)
0.2F
Nsd
= 80 kN
acp
where Nsd
-80
cam)
kN
465 x 300
(7)
-0.6 N/mm2
VRd,
[5 x 0.34 x 1.23 (1.2 + 40 x 0.006)
0.15
x 0.6]
x 465 x 300 = 407 kN
Therefore
VRdt
>
VSd
Fv
400 kN
.........................
OK
2.5.3.7.2(5)
8.1.3.2 Determine main reinforcement requirement
Now 0.4hc
shown
in
<_ a., therefore a simple strut and tie model may be assumed, as Figure 8.2.
Figure 8.2 Strut and tie model

E
Under the vertical load
-CU
2.5.3.7.2(1)
F,
Ft
Tie
ES
'Strut
f 0.4
0.0035
---
F
F
Fa
"
;
and
(0.8x)b cos2(3
1
<
0.85f
(
k
The determination of x will be an iterative procedure.
Choose x such that

0.S
es
0.002 and yd
400 N/mm2
E E
Therefore 0.0035 0.0035 + 0.002
x 465
296 mm
181
SPECIAL DETAILS
Now z
0.8x12
347 mm
and
cosy
Therefore, from above,

Ft
400 x 200
347
0.85 x 30 x 0.8
coo
0.5
E E
1.5
231 kN and
x 296 x 300 x
0.52
301 kN
For equilibrium Ft
F and further refinement gives

E
x =
235 mm,
z =
371 mm,
Ft
216 kN
addition, EC2 Clause 2.5.3.7.2(4) requires a horizontal force of applied at the bearing area.
In
HC
to be
2.5.3.7.2(4)
H
Ft
>_
0.2F
=
<T,
0.2
x 400 =
80 kN
HC
296 kN
(fl
A
s,req
296 x
103
460/1.15
Use 4T16 bars
8.1.3.3 Check crushing of compression
740 mm2
strut
This has been checked directly by the calculation of F above. However, an indirect check may also be made.
0-9
VRd2
2) v cd J bw0'9d
0.7
- k
0.55
-9 0.5
200
Therefore
NIA
VRd2
(2) x
0.55 x 20
x 300 x
0.9
x 465
690 kN
Hence
VRd2
>
400 kN
...............................
OK
8.1.3.4 Check link reinforcement requirements

((DD
Links are required if:

AS
0.4 Accd/fyd
AC
=
=
500 x 300
150 x 103
mm2
E
460
fcd
30
1.5
20 N/mm2
fyd
=
1.15
400 N/mm2
Eqn 4.19
Eqn 4.20
SIN
5.4.4(2)
Eqn 5.21
SPECIAL DETAILS
Hence, links are required if

As
>_
0.4
x 150 x
103
x 20/400
3000 mm2
E
Now
A s, prov =
804
< 3000 mm2
Therefore links are not required

Nevertheless, in practice some links should be provided to assist in fixing the main reinforcement.
A sw
>_
0.4A s,prov
0.4
x 804
322 mm2
E
5.4.4(2)
Use 4T8 links (8 legs)
8.1.3.5 Check bearing area of corbel
Allowable design ultimate bearing stress

(CT
0.8fCd
for bearing
bedded
in
concrete.
Therefore area required
Assume transverse bearing
=
400 x 103
0.8
EC2, Part 1 B
x 20
25000 mm2
250 mm
100 mm
Therefore length of bearing
8.1.4 Detailing
lb,net
250
60
cover to main bars

30
4T16 welded to T20 cross -bar
2T10
links
2T8 U-bars
Figure 8.3
Corbel reinforcement details
SPECIAL DETAILS
8.1.4.1
Anchorage of main bars at front edge of corbel

Anchor T16 ties by means the ties.
of a
cross bar running horizontally and welded to
F +
HC
296 kN
5.4.8.1
An allowable bearing stress under the cross bar can be obtained from EC2
Eqn 5.22 as
fads
3.3fod
Eqn 5.22 (mod)
Note: Use of this stress requires that the concrete be confined by means of links etc. In areas where the cover is small, the designer may wish to use a modified version of Eqn 50 in BS 8110(2).
((DD
Therefore area of bar required
296 x
3.3
103
x 20
4485 mm2
For a T20 bar, length required is 225 mm.
Use T20 cross bar 240 mm long welded to T16 ties
8.1.4.2 Anchorage of main bars into support

Required anchorage length
aalb
Ib,net
A
s,feq
A s, prov
1b,min
Eqn 5.4
Now
lb
= =
(0/4) (fyd /fbd) 400 N/mm2

will
Eqn 5.3
fyd
Bond conditions may be considered good as the T16 bars into a substantial support (column or wall).
fbd
1b
be anchored
5.2.2.1(2)(b)
= =
c(3
3N /MM2
(16/4)x(400/3) =
533 mm
E
Table 5.3
Now
4 s, req
740 mm2
A S. prov
804 mm2
as
5.2.3.4.1(1)
Therefore
lb,net
1
x 533 x 740
804
490 mm
Ib,min
0.31b
.9
100 or 100 mm
Provide
b,net
SPECIAL DETAILS
The detail at the front edge of the corbel is shown in Figure 8.4.
Figure 8.4
Detail at front edge of corbel
The inside face of the T20 bar is positioned not less than the cover beyond the edge of the bearing area.
This is an interpretation of BS 8110 as no guidance is given in EC2.
8.2 Nibs
8.2.1 Introduction
Consider a nib designed to carry a precast concrete floor slab imposing a vertical ultimate design load of 25 kN/m.
8.2.2 Materials
fCk
fYk
= =
30 N/mm2 (concrete strength class C30/37)
460 N/mm2 (characteristic yield strength)
8.2.3 Design
Provide a 15 mm chamfer to the outside edge of the nib and assume the line of action of the load occurs at the upper edge of the chamfer.
(CD
Permissible design ultimate bearing stress =

Therefore minimum width of bearing
E E
=
0.6f
for dry bearing

=
2.1
EC2 Part 1B
mm
E
25 x 103 3
0.6x20x1000
=
Minimum width of bearing for non-isolated member

E
40 mm
BS 8110 52 32
. . .
Allowance for nib spalling Allowance for inaccuracies

Nominal bearing width
=
= =
20 mm
25 mm
BS 8110
Table
E
5.2.4
5.1
BS 8110
40 + 2 0 + 25
+
85 mm
E
Allow an additional 25 mm for chamfer on
supported member.
E
E
Width of nib projection
85 + 25
+
110 mm
185
SPECIAL DETAILS
The distance of the line of action of the load from the face of the beam
=
110
15
95 mm
con
Assuming 20 mm cover to the T10 links in the beam

ac
95+20+5
E
120 mm
Check minimum depth of nib.

Assuming T8 bars, minimum internal diameter of loop is 60.
(1)
NAD
104 mm
Therefore minimum depth of nib

Depth of nib =
105 mm
20 + 8 x 8 + 20
Table 8
25 x 0.12
3 kNm/m
Effective depth (d)
=
3
105
20
=
0.015
81
mm
E E
M
bd2fck
106
1000 x 812 x 30
bd
AS
Asfyk
ck
0.018bdck
fyk
0.018
x 1000 x
460
81
x30
95 mm2
E
Check minimum area of reinforcement

E
5.4.2.1.1(1)
AS
0.6
fbtcd
yk
0.0015btd
Eqn 5.14
460
.9 0.0015
x 1000 x
81
122 mm2
4.4.2.2
Check minimum area of reinforcement for crack control

As
= = =
kckfct,effAct/Us
0.6x1000x81
106 mm2
Eq n 4.78
k,
k
fct,eff
0.4 for bending 0.8 for h

(Y)
<_
Therefore
As
`1U
300 mm
E
=
= =
3.0 N/mm2
Act
t
Qs
bh
2
1000 x 105
2
52.5 x 103 mm2

LC)
460 N/mm2
0.4 x 0.8 x 3.0 x 52.5 x 103 /460
110 mm2
SPECIAL DETAILS
No further check for crack control is necessary as h

'U)
105
<_
200 mm.
4.4.2.3.(1)
NAD
Maximum bar spacing
3h
315
500 mm
Table 3
Use T8 @ 300 mm crs. (168 mm2/m)
5.4.3.2.1(4)
Figure 8.5
Nib reinforcement details
Check shear in nib, taking into account the proximity of the concentrated load
Y-a)
4.3.2.3
to the support.
VRd1
=
=
[aTRdk(1.2
+ 40pi) + 0.15aePjb,,d 2.5 x 81

120
Eqn 4.18
Eqn 4.17
2.5d/x
TRd
0.34 N/mm2
1.6
L'2
1.69
d 4
=
168
1.52
Ac
Therefore
VRd,
VSd
n),
Therefore
VRd1 VSd
Check anchorage of T8 bars.

l b,net
`,c
ASi
Pi
bd
W
1000x81
=
0
0.0021
vcP
NSd
1.69
x 0.34 x 1.52(1.2 + 40 x 0.0021) x 1000 x 81 = 90.8 kN/m
25 kN/m
..........
reg (A4s,sprov)
OK
aa
lb
Eqn 5.4
SPECIAL DETAILS
Now
lb
fyd
(-014) (fydifbd)
Eqn 5.3
400 N/mm2
Bond conditions may be considered good as the bars are anchored at least 300 mm from the top of the member.
E
1b
5.2.2.1(2)(b)
fbd
= =
eq
3 N/mm2
(8/4) x (400/3) 122 mm2
Table 5.3
=
267 mm
Now As
As,pov
168 mm2
E
Therefore
lb,net
x 267 x
122 168
194 mm
1b,min
For bars in tension

lb,min
0.31b
100 or 100 mm
E
Therefore
lb,min
=
=
100 mm
E E
lb,net
For bars in compression

lb,min
0.61b
.9100 or 100 mm
Therefore
lb,min
=
=
160 mm
Ib,min
8.3 Simply supported ends

8.3.1
Directly supported ends

Reinforcement anchorage requirements are shown in Figure 8.6.
(a) Straight bar
Figure 8.6 Anchorage at a direct support
E
2
E E
3
b,
net
fib; net
(b) Hook
SPECIAL DETAILS
Figure 8.6(a) shows anchorage of tensile reinforcement being achieved using a straight bar. It should be noted that EC2 does not permit straight anchorage or bends for smooth bars of more than 8 mm diameter. Note: The CEB-FIP Model Code (16) gives a factor of 1.0 for l b,net as opposed to 2/3 in EC2. Designers may wish to consider using the higher value.
mall
+--'
5.4.2.1.4(3) Figure 5.12(a) 5.2.3.2(2)
Typical values for anchorage length and support width, w, can be obtained for (a) and (b) in Figure 8.6.
Assume
fCk
A s,req
30 N/mm2,
f vk =
460 N/mm2
1.0
A s,prov
c!'
Note:
reinforcement required at mid-span Asreq may be taken as one quarter of the but not less than that required to resist the tensile force given by EC2 Eqn 5.15.
NAD 6.5 5.4.2.1.4(3) 5.4.2.1.4(2)
l b, net
1b
a l b
=
( As
As,
req )
.r,
lb,min
Eqn 5 4
.
L()
prov
(0/4) (yd/fbd)
3 N/mm2
Eq n 5.3
fbd
= =
Table 5.3
yd
Therefore
lb
400 N/mm2
= = = =
(0/4) x (400/3)
0.31 b
33.30
l b,min
a
r, 100 or 100 mm
Eq n 5.5
for straight bars; or

5.2.3.4.1(1)
a
Therefore
lb,net
0.7 for curved bars with 30 transverse cover
(a) =
x 33.30
33.30
23.30
lb,net
(b)=
0.7
x 33.30 =
Therefore width of support required in Figure 8.6(a), assuming 20 mm cover and 15 mm chamfer
(co
w (a)
(3) x 33.30 + 35 = 22.20 + 35 mm

C'7
E E
and width of support required

WIN
in
Figure 8.6(b), assuming as above

= 15.50 + 35 mm
()1
w (b) =
(3) x 23.30 + 35
SPECIAL DETAILS
The minimum support width is given by

wmin
(3) x
100 + 35
eq
= 6.70 + 35 mm
0.3As,P ov
C'7
where, in Figure 8.6(a), As and, in Figure 8.6(b), As

eq
0.43As,Pov
As noted above, ae = 0.7 can only be used if the concrete cover perpendicular to the plane of curvature is at least 30. This is clearly difficult to achieve in beams without end diaphrams for bar sizes in excess of 12 mm.
caC!)
The requirements for the various types of hooks, loops and bends are given in EC2 Figure 5.2. The minimum diameters of mandrels are given in NADO) Table 8. The required support widths are given in Table 8.1.
Table
8.1
CAD
Width of support (mm)
As,rea A ,prw
1.0
:5
3v,
(mm)
10
12
16
20
25
32
C17
w(a)
257
102
302
116
221
391
479
((0
590
203
746
250
531
0.3
min
143
169
1.0
w(b)
190
283
345
423
:50.43
min
102
116
143
169
203
250
8.3.2 Indirectly supported ends

Reinforcement anchorage requirements are shown in Figure 8.7.
L
aim
Ib,net
b
b(a)
Ib,net
b(b)
(a)
Straight bar
(b)
Hook
Figure 8.7 Anchorage at an indirect support
As in Section 8.3.1 above, anchorage lengths and support widths can be obtained for both straight bars and hooked bars.
The anchorage lengths are as Section 8.3.1 but the required support widths are increased.
Assuming 20 mm cover
b(a) =
(33.30 + 20) x 1.5 = 500 + 30 mm (23.30 + 20) x 1.5 = 350 + 30 mm
b(b) =
.;e
SPECIAL DETAILS
The minimum support beam width is given by

bmin
(100 + 20) x 1.5
150 + 30 mm
where the same conditions apply as in Section 8.3.1.
these cases, as the beam is indirectly supported, i.e., by another beam, 30 cover perpendicular to the plane of the curvature can be achieved more easily and a = 0.7 can be readily used in EC2 Eqn 5.4.
In
The required support beam widths are given in Table 8.2.
(ig
Table 8.2
ASèQ
Width of support beam (mm)
Aspr
1.0
<_
(MM)
10
12
16
20
25
32
b(a)
530
630
830
1030
1280
1630
0.3
1.0
b-n
b(b)
180
380
210
450
270
590
330
730
405
905
510
1150
!5 0.43
min
180
210
270
330
405
510
8.4 Surface reinforcement

In certain circumstances it may be necessary to provide surface reinforcement located outside the links.
r-.
5.4.2.4
Surface reinforcement is provided to resist spalling from fire and where bundled bars or bar sizes greater than 32 mm are used.
EC2 also refers to the use of skin reinforcement located inside the links. Skin reinforcement is provided to control cracking in the side faces of beams 1 m
5.4.2.4(3)
or more in depth.
Eu)
'N
4.4.2.3(4)
Oaf
a)-0
8.4.1 Design data

A beam section requiring surface reinforcement is shown in Figure 8.8.
Figure 8.8
Beam section showing main reinforcement
SPECIAL DETAILS
8.4.2 Area of longitudinal surface reinforcement

As.surf
0.01Act,ext
5.4.2.4(5)
From EC2 Figure 5.15

Act,ext
x 50 x (1000
360) + 50 x 300
79 x 103 mm2
Therefore
As,surt
=
Act,ext
0.01
x 79 x
O')
103
790 mm2
Length of
internal perimeter
490 x 2 + 300
1280 mm
E
Hence
790
As,surf/m
617 mm2/m
1.280
Use B785 fabric
This comprises 10 mm wires @ 100 mm crs. horizontally and 8 mm wires @ 200 mm crs. vertically.
Note: EC2 does not directly cover the use of plain wire fabric.
Surface reinforcement may also be used as longitudinal bending reinforcement in the horizontal direction and as shear reinforcement in the vertical direction in some cases.
_m.
5.2.3.4.3
aU)
5.4.2.4(6)
(i1
surface reinforcement is being used to resist shear, EC2 Clause 5.4.2.2(4) should be noted. It states that a minimum of 50% of shear reinforcement should be in the form of links.
If
(7)
The reinforcement detail is shown in Figure 8.9.
reinforcement
_+-mss
Figure 8.9
0-5
5.4.2.2(4)
L()
B785 surface
d-x=540
600
8-T32
st -< 150
Beam section showing surface reinforcement.
192
9.1
Introduction
Design of a prestressed band beam with bonded post-tensioned tendons, to support a ribbed floor slab, is set out.
This example is similar to Example 2 in the Concrete Society's Post tensioned concrete floors: Design handbook").
9.2 Design data

The floor plan and section for the structure are shown in Figure 9.1. The band beams run along the column lines in the longitudinal direction. The floor slab contains unbonded tendons, and is not designed here.
5.0
==9
I
r====---1
__I
ffi
\
1
500 x 500
I
7200
7200
I
I
7200
9000
9000
PLAN
A
B
C
3900
3900
A - A
Figure
9.1
Floor plan and section
9.2.1 Beam section

The effective flange width of the beam for calculation of stiffnesses or stresses is taken as
ben
bW
+ (5)
to
2508 mm
< b
2.5.2.2.1 P(2)
Eqn 2.13
The beam section is shown in Figure 9.2.
2508
110
240
750
750
Figure 9.2
Beam section
9.2.2 Durability
For components in dry environment, exposure class is
1.
Table
4.1
Minimum concrete strength grade for post-tensioned members is C25/30. Minimum cover to reinforcement is 15 mm.
Use 25 mm nominal cover to reinforcement
4.2.3.5.2
4.1.3.3
NAD Table 6
4.1.3.3(11)
Minimum cover to duct is given as the smaller cross-sectional dimension of the
duct but not less than half the greater cross-sectional dimension.
Use nominal cover to duct K 50 mm
BS 8110 4.12.3.2
9.2.3 Materials
9.2.3.1 Reinforcement
Type 2 deformed bars, characteristic strength, f ductility
460 N/mm2 having high
NAD 6.3(a)
(i3
9.2.3.2 Prestressing steel

15.7 mm diameter superstrand,
((D
grouped in oval ducts 20 x 75 mm

E
Characteristic strength,
A
P
9.2.3.3 Concrete
In order that this example can be compared with that given in Example 2 of the Post tensioned concrete floors: Design handbook, a non-standard concrete strength grade has been chosen of C32/40.
fPk
1770 N/mm2
E
BS 5896
=
=
150 mm2
190 kN/mm2
3.3.4.4
fCk
= =
= =
32 N/mm2 20 N/mm2 strength at transfer

9.5 9.5
fc
ECM
x (32 + 8)"' x (20 +

x
32.4 say 32 kN/mm2

28.8 say 29 kN/mm2
3.1.2.5.2(3)
E0
9.2.4 Loading
Imposed loading
=
5.0 kN/m2
Effective width of slab
Self-weight of slab and beam
9.3 Serviceability
9.3.1 Tendon
The tendon profile is shown in Figure 9.3.
Figure 9.3 Tendon profile

Initial prestressing force is taken as
PO
Losses are assumed to be
15% of P0 at transfer 30% of P0 at service

Hence prestressing force
At transfer, Pm0
At service, Pm-
9.3.2 Maximum drape

Span 1-2
1.U
4.2.3.5.4P(2)
10.22 m
35.60 + 12.60
48.20 kNlm
limit state
details
0.75 x
(f)
fPk
AP
199.1 kN
per tendon
4.2.3.5.4P(3)
169.3 kN per tendon
139.4 kN per tendon
kx(s
x) where s is the distance between inflexion points
195
Using Appendix C of Post tensioned concrete floors: Design handbook
1.70
10 -5 and s
5760 mm
At mid-span
Y
1.70
E
x 10 -5 x 28802
141
mm
Span
2-3 at
=
mid-span
350
62.5
45
62.5
180 mm
9.3.3 Prestress required

Take an equivalent balanced load equal to the self-weight.
Span 1-2
Preq 48.2 x 57602
8 x 141
1418 kN
x 1000
Span 2-3
Preq 48.2 x 57602
8 x 180 x 1000
(Y)
1111
kN
Number of tendons required

Use
11
1418/139.4
10.17
tendons throughout beam
9.3.4 Equivalent loads from prestress

The equivalent loads from the longitudinal tendons, given by q = 8(nPav)a/s2 where n = 11, are calculated in Tables 9.1 and 9.2.
Table 9.1
Calculation of equivalent loads from longitudinal tendons at transfer, for the full slab width
E
1
Span
nPa, (kN)
2
1861.6 1861.6 1861.6
2
1861.6 1861.6 1861.6
a (mm)
S (mm)
30
1440
-141
5760
40
1440
45
1440
-180
5760
45
1440
q (kN/m)
216.9
-63.3
289.4
323.2
-80.8
323.2
Table 9.2 Calculation of equivalent loads from longitudinal tendons after all losses, for the full slab width
Span
nPa (kN)
1
2
(`7
1533.4
30
1440
1533.4
-141
r-.
1533.4
40
1440
1533.4
45
1440
1533.4
-180 5760
1533.4
45
1440
a(mm)
S
(mm)
5760
q (kN/m)
178.7
-52.1
238.4
266.2
-66.6
266.2
9.3.5 Load cases

For continuous beams, the following arrangements of imposed loads should
2.5.1.2(4)
be considered:
(a)
alternate spans loaded;

any two adjacent spans loaded.
2.3.4P(2) NAD
Table
1
(b)
The rare, frequent and quasi-permanent load combinations should be considered where the values of , , and 02 are taken from NAD Table 1(t). For
imposed loads in offices
01
0.6 and 02
0.3.
Rare combination, Gk + P + 0k
Eqn 2.9(a)
Frequent combination,
Gk +
P + 0.60 k
Gk +
Eqn 2.9(b) Eqn 2.9(c)
Quasi-permanent combination,
P + 0.3Qk
9.3.6 Maximum concrete stresses

As the beam is a T-section, the values of W and W are not equal. By calculation it can be shown that I = 6.79 x 109 mm' and that the centroid of the section is at a height of 196 mm from the soffit.
A =
635.9 x 103 mm2
>+"O
Therefore
We
= =
44.1
106 mm3
Wb
34.6 x 106 mm3
The calculation of the stresses under each load combination is not shown here. The method follows that given in the Post tensioned concrete floors: Design handbook. The top and bottom concrete stress for transfer conditions are given in Table 9.3 and those after all losses are given in Table 9.4.
Table 9.3 Stresses at transfer
Zone
Top stresses, f'
`c
Bottom stresses,
00)
fb
(N/mm
max. E
1
(N/mm
min. max. min.
1.83
(support)
3.42
2.21
3.40
1-2
(span)
2
3.15
2.20
(support)
2
3.81
(support)
4.10
1.23
4.66
1.34
0.97
2-3
(span)
3
3.07
2.29
(support)
4.45
0.53
Table 9.4
Stresses after all losses

Rare loading
Zone
E
Top stresses,
f
min.
(N/mmz) max.
Bottom stresses, (N/mmz)
_)E
fb
max.
8.75
3.05
10.8
min.
(support)
CJ)
-2.53
5.64
1.91
1-2
(span)
2
-1.73
(support)
2
-4.19
-3.31
4.68 0.93
(support)
9.82
4.31
2-3
(span)
3
-0.50
(support)
-2.95
9.30
Frequent loading
Zone
Top stresses,
(
min.
(N/mmz)
fb
max.
1
max.
6.62
min.
(support)
-0.87
4.37 2.19
1-2
(span)
2
2.69
8.02
7.00
-0.10
(support)
2
-1.96
-1.17
3.44
1.19
(support)
2-3
(span)
3
3.98 6.48
1.09
(support)
-0.77
Quasi-permanent loading
Zone
Top stresses,
f,
(N/mmz) max. min.

0.38
3.41

max.
5.02
E
fb
min.
(support)
1-2
(span)
2 2
2.19
2.69
5.87
1.13
(support)
-0.29
0.48
2.81
S2-
(support)
4.89
3.73 1.89
2-3
(span)
3
1.38
(support)
-0.87
4.38
9.3.7 Allowable compressive stresses

prevent longitudinal cracks the compressive stress under rare load combinations should not exceed
To
0.6fCk
4.4.1
0.6 x 32 = 19.2 N/mm2

.
4.4.1.1(2)
The maximum stress from Table 9.4 is 10.8 N/mm2

To
ac)
...............
E
OK
control creep the compressive stress under quasi-permanent loading should not exceed
0.45f
k
0.45 x 32
14.4 N/mm2
4.4.1.1(3)
The maximum stress from Table 9.4 is 5.87
N/mm.................
E
OK
9.3.8 Limit state of cracking

Design crack width for post-tensioned member under frequent load combinations
wk
0.2 mm
--o
No check is required at transfer since beam is totally in compression.

V),
4.4.2.1
The method adopted to determine the minimum reinforcement required is to carry out a rigorous calculation of the crack width where the flexural tensile stress under rare loads exceeds 3 N/mm2. If the calculated crack width under frequent loads does not exceed 0.2 mm then further bonded reinforcement is not required.
Q-,
From Table 9.4 the stress at support 2 under the rare load combination is -4.19 N/mm2 and hence a more detailed calculation is required. As this example is a beam, at least two longitudinal bars at the top and bottom are required to hold the links in place.
For this analysis include 2T16s in the top of the beam.
E
Wk
u,'
X00
-am
Table 4.10 4.4.1.2.(5) 4.4.1.2(7) 4.4.2.4
(=,
c'7
N S rm 6sm
Eqn 4 80
.
1.7
srm
for load induced cracking
4.4.2.4(2)
The value of
can be conservatively calculated as

x
4.4.2.4(8)
srm =
The value of
((DD
Esm
can be conservatively calculated as

()
vS
Esm
Eqn 4 81
.
ES
The values of os and x, the neutral axis depth, for this example were determined from computer analysis assuming linear stress/strain relationships and no tension from the concrete.
30(u
Applied moment =
-377.6 kNm (frequent load case)
Q).
x
vS
1-1
213 mm
-95.8 N/mm2
Hence wk = 1.7 x (350
213)
95.8
0.11
200 x 10
< 0.2 mm .. OK
9.3.9 Calculation of
Pm,t PM'0
prestress losses per tendon

APc APc
=
=
P0
APA(X)
APS1 APS!
"I-
Apt(t)
2.5.4.2
Eqn 2.19
4.2.3.5.4 Eq n 4.8
4.2.3.5.5
P0
APA(X)
9.3.9.1
Short term losses

elastic deformation
= ES E
.
(5-8)
9.3.9.1.1 Loss due to
4.2.3.5.5(6)
Modular ratio
190
6.55
29
Maximum stress in concrete adjacent to tendons at transfer occurs at middle

of
span 2-3.
From Table 9.3, stress at level of tendons
4.66
62.5
(4.66
350
1.23)
4.05 N/mm2
Average loss of force due to elastic deformation of concrete

OPT
0.5
x 4.05 x 6.55 x 150 x 10-3 =
1.99 kN
The loss, which has been conservatively based on the maximum concrete stress rather than the stress averaged along the length of the tendon, is only 1% of the jacking force and will be neglected.
9.3.9.1.2 Loss due to friction
4.2.3.5.5(8)
AP,(x) =
CL,)
Po
(1
e -a(e+kx))
199.1 kN
Eqn 4.9
Po
jacking force =
0 0
0.19 (recommended for strand)
=
=
0.0085 (from Post tensioned concrete floors: Design handbook)
8
X
E/
8a
for each span
7.2 m for each span
Span 1-2
0
OP2
- 4x30
1440
8x
141
4x40
1440
0.392
5760
199.1(1
16.4
e-0.19(0.392
+ 0.0085 x 7.2))
16.4 kN
Therefore
P2
199.1
182.7 kN
Span
2-3
x 45 + 8 x 180
1440
0.500
5760
AP3
199.1(1
e-0.19(0892
+ 00085 x 144) )
34.9 kN
Therefore
P3
199.1
34.9
164.2 kN
9.3.9.1.3 Loss due to wedge set (Asp = 6 mm)
APsi
2p,li
where
199.1
164.2
2.42 kN/m
14.4 AslEs
pf
1,
=
2
AP
0.006 x 190 x 150
2.4
40.7 kN
8.4 m
APs1
x 2.42 x 8.4 =
The resulting force profile is shown in Figure 9.4.
8400
Jacking
199.1
181
1787
1642
1758'
15
84
Transfer
1312
I
Final
All forces
in kN)
Figure 9.4
Force profiles
9.3.9.1.4 Percentage losses at transfer
At
199.1
1:
158.4
x 100
20.4%
199.1 199.1
At 2:
175.8
x 100 =
11.7%
199.1 199.1
At 3:
164.2
x 100 = 17.5%
199.1
Average loss
16.5% (15% assumed)
..................
...
OK
9.3.9.2 Long term losses

9.3.9.2.1 Creep and shrinkage
data
3.1.2.5.5
Notional size of section from Figure 9.2,

2AC
2(2508 x 110 + 1500 x 240)
2(2508 + 240)
For inside conditions and transfer at 7 days,

3.0
ECS(-)
+ +
230 mm
Table 3.3
(J)
0.00058
Table 3.4
4.2.3.4.1(2) Table 4.8 NAD Table 3
(Y)
9.3.9.2.2 Relaxation data

Long term class 2 relaxation loss for initial stress of 0.67f transfer
Daps
k
9.3.9.2.3 Loss due to creep, shrinkage and relaxation

ES(t,to) ES
DU p,c+s+r
=
1
4J
immediately after
1.5
x 0.02vPo =
0.03apo
+ Au Pr + ceO(t,td(acg + acPd
(1
+ x
A +
p AC
A z2
(Y)
4.2.3.5.5(9)
P)
[1
+ 0.80(t,t)]
Eqn 4.10
ES
ECM
At
1:
190
5.94
32
zcp
Therefore
ag C =
0
11
x 158.4 x
635880
103
2.74 N/mm2
At
2:
zcp
287.5
196
91.5 mm 74.2 x 106 mm3
w
p
- I zcP
6.79 x 109
91.5
Cg
+Ucpo
M Wcp
P
Ac
Using moment and force at transfer _

oC9
(6.17 + 30.38)
106
11
175.8
103
p0
74.2
106
+
3.53 N/mm2
635880
0.49 + 3.04
At
3:zcp
IN
cp
=
=
91.5 mm
74.2 x 106 mm3
C9
+U
CPO
49.36 x 106
74.2
11
x 164.2 x
635880
103
x
+
106
0.67 + 2.84
3.51 N/mm2
Losses of prestress
+
At
1:
Au p,c+s+r _
0.00058 x 190 x 103 + 31.7 + 5.94 x 3 x 2.74

+
5.94 x 1650
635880 x
6.79
02
(1
635880
+ 0.8 x 3)
109
110.2 + 31.7 + 48.8

1
+ 5.24 x 10-2(l + 9.36 x 10-5 x 02)
190.7 1.052 APt(t)
181.2 N/mm2
181.2
x 150 x 10-3
27.2 kN
At 2: Aup,c+s+r =
1
110.2 + 35.2 + 5.94
x 3 x 3.53
CA)
(A)
+ 5.24 x 10-2
=
(1
+ 9.36 x 10-5 x 91.52)
208.3
1.093
190.6 N/mm2
APt(t)
190.6
x 150 x 10-3
+
28.6 kN
At 3: Au p,c+s+r
+
110.2+32.8+5.94
+
1.093
x3
x3.81
193.0 N/mm2
1.093
00)
(A)
APl(t)
193.0
x 150 x 10-3
CA)
210.9
29.0 kN
Final forces at service (see Figure 9.4)

At
1:
P,
= = =
158.4
175.8
27.2
= =
=
131.2 kN
147.2 kN
At 2: P,
28.6 29.0
At 3: Pt
164.2
135.2 kN
9.3.9.2.4 Percentage losses at service

At
199.1
1:
(OD
131.2
x 100 =
34.1%
199.1
COD
At 2:
199.1
147.2
x 100
26.1%
199.1
At 3:
199.1
135.2
x 100 =
32.1%
199.1
Average loss
30.8% (30% assumed)
.......................
OK
9.4 Ultimate
9.4.1
limit state
4.311P(2),
P(4) & P(6)
2.3.3.1
tiQ
"1D
Calculation of applied moments

Partial safety factors
^YG
=
t/)
1.35,
1.5,
-YP
1.0
Table 2.2
2.5.4.4.1(2)
Load cases
as for serviceability
2.5.1.2
4.3.1.2P(1)
9.4.2 Calculation of resistance moments

The section may be analysed as shown in Figure 9.5.
Rectangular stress block for concrete
in
compression with
0.85,
cd
32
1.5
4.3.1.2(4) 4.2.1.3.3(12)
21.3 N/mm2
Figure 4.4
AEp
FS
S fpd Ap
(d-04x)
d
Fc
L
0
115
0035
c fcd
Figure 9.5
Analysis of section at ultimate limit state

4.2.3.3.3 Figure 4.6
Horizontal top branch to stress-strain curve for prestressing steel with

fpd
0.9 ( pk)
-YS
0.9
x 1770
1.15
1385 N/mm2
For stress to reach maximum design value
Minimum strain,
E
fpd
EP
1385
190 x 103
0.0073
ES
204
139.4
Prestrain, epm
A P Es
150 x 190
0.0049
Increment, Dep
E
0.0073
0.0049
0.0024
Maximum neutral axis/effective depth ratio
x d
0.0035
0.0035 + 0.0024
<Lc)
0.593
For values of x
LL,
0.593d
= 1385 x =
11
=
=
fpdAp
FS(d
x 150 x 10-3 =
x
2285 kN
MRd
0.4x)
2.285(d
0.4x) kNm
where
F
F
X
=
=
af
cdb(0.8x)
0.85 x 21.3 x 0.8bx
14.5bx
F gives
2285 x
103
157600
mm
196 mm
14.5b
At support
X
1:
LC)
b
1500 mm, d =
157600
1500
105
mm
<
...........................
d
MRd
=
196
0.536
0.593
2.285(196
0.4 x 105)
L[)
CA)
105
OK
351.9 kNm
At supports 2 and 3: b
MRd
1500 mm, d
0.4
287.5 mm
2.285(287.5
x 105) =
561.0 kNm
In spans: b
2508 mm, d =
= 63 mm
287.5 mm
E E
x
MRd
157600
2508
= 2.285(287.5
<
hf
= =
110 mm
.............
OK
0.4 x 63)
599.4 kNm
9.4.3 Comparison of moments

The calculation of the moments due to the applied loads (yG = 1.35, -yo = 1.5) is not shown here. These moments are combined with the secondary moments due to prestressing (yp = 1.0) and compared with the resistance moments at each position. The results are summarized in Table 9.5.
205
Table 9.5
Zone
Moments at ultimate limit state

Secondary moments (kNm) 122.0
83.6
45.1
Moments from ultimate loads (kNm)
Applied moments (kNm)
Resistance moments, MRd (kNm)
(support)
-461.1
350.8
3-O
-339.1
434.4
-351.9
599.4
1-2
(span)
2
(support)
2
-673.9
-628.1
309.4
-628.8 -565.5
376.8
-561.0 -561.0
599.4
(support)
62.6 67.4
72.2
2-3
(span)
3
(support)
-604.4
-532.2
L[)
-561.0
The resistance moment is inadequate at support 2 and additional reinforcement is required.

E
Since
M
x2
F (d
0.4x)
=
0
14.5bx(d
0.4x),
2.5dx
+2.5M
14.5b
Hence
1.25 (1
M
I
1
9.06bd2 )
628.8 x 106
9.06 x 1500
1.25
(1
1
287.5
121
mm
287.52
d x
121
121 287.5
=
M
0.421
<
0.593
..........................
OK
628.8 x
103
d-0.4x
287.5-0.4x121
2630 kN
Additional area of reinforcement required
F
As S
f,d
plop
(2630
2285)103
400
863 mm2
2T16 and 2T20 gives 1030
> 863 mm2
.......................
OK
Use 2T16 top and bottom throughout beam with additional 2T20 top at
support 2
9.5 Minimum and maximum areas of reinforcement

Although it is not clear what should be assumed from EC2(1), the total area of steel has been taken as the sum of the untensioned and tensioned steel.
(CZ
5.4.2.1.1
A s+p =
As
(2
+A
x
201) + (11
x 150) =
(1n
2052 mm2
9.5.1
Minimum
Minimum area of total tension reinforcement 0.6btd
Eqn 5.14
0.0015btd
f
yk
At support, bt
=
=
2508 mm
0.6
Minimum area
x 2508 x 290
460
.9 0.00.15
x 2508 x 290
Area provided
2052 > 1090 mm2
948 mm2
1090 mm2
........................
OK
9.5.2 Maximum
Maximum area of total tension and compression reinforcement
0.04AC
= 0.04 x 635880 = 25435 > 2052 mm2
....
OK
9.6 Reinforcement summary

11
tendons throughout beam

0
2T16s top and bottom throughout beam. Additional 2T20s top at support 2
These areas are within maximum and minimum
limits.
207
10 SERVICEABILITY CHECKS BY CALCULATION

10.1
Deflection
Calculate the long term deflection of a 7.0 m span simply supported beam whose section is shown in Figure 10.1. The beam supports the interior floor spans of an office building.
5-0
C.
1650
d'
50
ffAss
450
r
As
250
d = 390
Figure
10.1
Beam section
Deflections will be calculated using the rigorous and simplified methods given in EC2(1), together with an alternative simplified method. The results will then be compared with the limiting span/effective depth ratios given in EC2.
N(9
10.1.1
Design data
Span
Gk
:-'
7.0 m
= =
19.7 kN/m
Qk
19.5 kN/m
A'
AS
ick
= = =
402 mm2
2410 mm2
30 N/mm2 (conc rete stre n gth class C30/37)
CD
3.1.2.4 Table 3.1
10.1.2 Calculation method

The requirements for the calculation of deflections are given in Section 4.4.3 and Appendix 4 of EC2.
Two limiting conditions are assumed to exist for the deformation of concrete
A4.3(1)
sections
(1)
Uncracked
Cracked.
A4.3(2)
(2)
Members which are not expected to be loaded above the level which would cause the tensile strength of the concrete to be exceeded, anywhere in the
member, will be considered to be uncracked. Members which are expected to crack will behave in a manner intermediate between the uncracked and fully cracked conditions.
For members subjected dominantly to flexure, the Code gives a general equation for obtaining the intermediate value of any parameter between the limiting
conditions
a
where
all +
(1
Dal
A4.3(2)
Eqn A.4.1
-(f)
is the parameter being considered l and n are the values of the parameter calculated for the uncracked
and fully cracked conditions respectively

is a
distribution coeffient given by

1
0102
(
A4.3(2)
)2
Eqn A.4.2
The effects of creep are catered for by the use of an effective modulus of elasticity for the concrete given by
ECM
Ec,eft
1+0
p"U
A4.3.(2) Eqn A.4.3
Bond and deterioration of bond under sustained or repeated loading is taken account of by coefficients a1 and a2 in Eqn A.4.2
Curvatures due to shrinkage may be assessed from

1
cs
as
e
(n
A4.3(2)
r cs
Eqn AAA
Shrinkage curvatures should be calculated for the uncracked and fully cracked conditions and the final curvature assessed by use of Eqn A.4.1.
In accordance with the Code, the rigorous method of assessing deflections is to calculate the curvatures at frequent sections along the member and calculate the deflections by numerical integration.
The simplified approach, suggested by the Code, is to calculate the deflection assuming firstly the whole member to be uncracked and secondly the whole member to be cracked. Eqn A.4.1 is used to assess the final deflection.
10.1.3 Rigorous assessment

The procedure
(1)
is,
at frequent intervals along the member, to calculate

0
ago
Moments
Curvatures Deflections.
(2) (3)
Here, calculations will be carried out at the mid-span position only, to illustrate this procedure, with values at other positions along the span being tabulated.
0-0
_-'
10.1.3.1
Calculation of moments
For buildings,
duration.
it will normally be satisfactory to consider the deflections under the quasi-permanent combination of loading, assuming this load to be of long
A4.2(5)
The quasi-permanent combination of loading is given, for one variable action, by

Gk
+ w2Qk
2.3.4 P(2)
Eqn 2.9(c)
09
02
0.3
NAD
Table
=
19.7 + (0.3
CC]
Therefore Loading
19.5)
25.6 kN/m 25.6 x 72/8
Mid-span bending
moment("
156.8 kNm
10.1.3.2 Calculation of curvatures
order to calculate the curvatures it is first necessary to calculate the properties of the uncracked and cracked sections and determine the moment at which
In
cracking
will
occur.
10.1.3.2.1 Flexural curvature
CAD
The effective modulus of elasticity
(Ec,eff)
1
ECM
A4.3(2) Eqn A.4.3
For concrete strength class C30/37, Ecm
32 kN/mm2
3.1.2.5.2 Table 3.2
2A c
U
2[(1650 x 150) + (250 x 300) ]

2(1650 + 300)
=
165 mm
For internal conditions and age at loading of 7 days

4)
3.1.2.5.5 Table 3.3

('')
3.1
Therefore
Ec,eff
=
1
32
=
3.1
7.8 kN/mm2
Effective modular ratio ( ae)
Modulus of elasticity of reinforcement

Therefore
a
e
200
7.8
E5
Ec,eft
(ES)
200 kN/mm2
3.2.4.3(1)
25.64
AS
p
bd
1650 x 390
A'
PI
C11
2410
3.75x10-
402
1650 x 390
bd
6.25 x
10_4
For the uncracked section, the depth to the neutral axis is given by
bh2/2
X
- (b - b) (h - h) (h hf + hf) + (ae - 1) (A'Sd' + Asd) 2 bhf + bN,(h - hf) + (ae - 1) (A's + A)
= 165.2 mm
E
The second moment of the area of the uncracked section is given by
bh 3
I'
(h+hf_
X
b W(h
12
h f )3
+ bhf (x
122
12
hil2)2 + bw(h
hf)
+ (ae-1) A'S(x-d')2 + (CYe-1)
Ajd-x)2
= 7535 x
106 rnm4
For the cracked section the depth to the neutral axis is given by
d =
x
[Cep + (ae
+ [aeP + (ae
=
134.6 mm
E
- 1)p']
+ 2 [eP+(e
- 1)P' d
/]
0.345d
The second moment of area of the cracked section is given by

+
cxep(1
'r)
bd3
3 (
dl
I>(
'
(Cle
Xl
1)P'
(d
In
0.0556bd3
5448 x 106 mm4
The moment which will cause cracking of the section is given by

M cr
yt yt
For concrete strength grade C30/37,
Therefore
The section is considered to be cracked, since
Curvature of the uncracked section is given by

1
Curvature of the cracked section is given by

1
Having obtained the values for the two limiting conditions Eqn AAA is used to assess the intermediate value.
Hence
tip
rl
x =
450
165.2
fctm
284.8 mm 2.9 N/mm2 3.1.2.4
E E
Table 3.1
Mcr
2.9x7535x106x10-6
284.8
76.7 kNm
Mcr
<
156.8 kNm
M
Ec,effll
_
7.8
156.8
106
106
103
x 7535 x
= 2.668 x 10-6 rad./mm
_
III
7.8
156.8
106 106
ru
Ec,eff
103
x 5448 x
= 3.690 x 10-6 rad./mm

E
tip
)
"
(1
'
A4.3(2) Eqn A.4.1
a, a2
asr as
)2
For high bond bars,
a,
1.0
For sustained loading, 62

Q
0.5
is the
stress
in
the tension steel calculated on the basis of a cracked section
Therefore aeM (d
S
- x)
25.64 x 156.8 x 106 (390
- 134.6)
= 188.5 N/mm2
III
5448 x 106
vsr is the stress in the tension steel calculated on the basis of a cracked section under the loading which will just cause cracking at the section considered.
Therefore
osr
aeMcr (d
X)
III
25.64 x 76.7 x 106 390
5448 x
Therefore
( 106
134.6
)
92.2 N/mm2
=
Note:
osr
ors
0.5 (
92.2
188.5
12
0.88
may be replaced by
=
r in the above calculation

M
III
-ca
1
r
[(0.88 x 3.69) + (1-0.88) x 2.668] x 10-6 = 3.567 x 10-6 rad./mm
10.1.3.2.2 Shrinkage curvature
The shrinkage curvature is given by

1
S
E
cse of
A.4.3.2
res
Eqn AAA
where
Ecs
is the free shrinkage strain
For internal conditions and 2AC/u

ecs
= 165 mm
3.1.2.5.5
0.60
x 10-3
cad
Table 3.4
S is the first moment of area of the reinforcement about the centroid of the
section.
1
is the second moment of area of the section.
S and I should be calculated for both the uncracked and fully cracked conditions.
Curvature of the uncracked section
SI
AS(d
x)
- A'S(x -
d')
495.5
103 mm3
0.60
resl
x 10-3 x 25.64 x 495.5 x 7535 x 106
103
1.0
10-6
rad.lmm
Curvature of the cracked section
S
1
AS(d
x)
- A'S (x -
L,,
d')
581.5
103 mm3
0.60x10-3x
25.64 x 581.5 x 103
resn
5448 x 106
1.64
x 10-brad./mm
Therefore
1
=fix
_
r CS
+(1
-0x
(1
rCs
rCS1
[(0.88 x 1.64) +
- 0.88)
x 1.0] x 10-6 = 1.563 x 10-6 rad./mm
The total curvature at mid-span

1
rtot
1
rcs
= (3.567 + 1.563) x 10-6 = 5.130 x 10-brad./mm
The flexural, shrinkage and total curvatures at positions x11 along the span are given in Table 10.1.
Table 10.1 Curvatures x 106 (rad./mm)
1
Ì1
x/1
0
Moment (kNm)
0 0
(-)
r,
T.
r
0 0
r.,
1.000
rw
1.000
0.1
56.4 100.4
0.960
1.708
2.363
0.708
0.960
2.171
1.000
1.960
0.2
1.453
1.531
3.624
0 0
0.3
131.7
2.241
2.561
(J)
3.100 3.542
3.690
0.830 0.870
0.880
2.954 3.414
3.567
4.485
4.971
0.4 0.5 0.6

0.7
0.8
L()
150.5 156.8 150.5

131.7
100.4
OW)
1.557
2.668
2.561
1.563
5.130
4.971
3.542 3.100
0.870 0.830
3.414 2.954
2.171
1.557
1.531
2.241
1.708
4.485
3.624
2.363
0.708
1.453
0.9
1.0
56.4
0
0.960
0
0
0
0.960
0
1.000
1.000
1.960
1.000
10.1.3.3 Calculation
of deflections
Having calculated the total curvatures, the deflections may be calculated by numerical integration using the trapezoidal rule.
The uncorrected rotation at any point may be obtained by the first integral given
by
1
eX
6X_ +
rX + r 2
x11
X_1
l xn
213
())
Having calculated the uncorrected rotations, the uncorrected deflections may be obtained by the second integral given by
(S=
tea)
ax
ax_, +
1
ex
+2 ex-1 / n 1
+L+
-(3
where the subscript x denotes the values of the parameters at the fraction of the span being considered, and the subscript x-1 denotes the values of the parameters at the preceding fraction of the span.
3-m
l
n
is
the span
number of span divisions considered.
0.11
is the
Hence the uncorrected rotation at
8+(
r.,
l+
2
1 r
l n
10_6
0 +
1.96 + 1.0
2
I
7000
10
((D
1.036 x
10_3
rad.
and the uncorrected deflection at

all
-9
2
0.11
n
10 _3
0 + (1.03
0)
0 x 7000
The uncorrected deflections may then be corrected to comply with the boundary conditions of zero deflection at both supports. This is done by subtracting from the uncorrected deflections the value of the uncorrected deflection at the right hand support multiplied by the fraction of the span at the point being considered. The values of the uncorrected rotations, uncorrected and corrected deflections at positions x/l along the span are given in Table 10.2.
Table 10.2
x/!
riot
0.363 mm
0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8
CJ)
3.624
22.356
Off)
54.998
71.331
88.711
70.969
79.840
88.711
-15.970
0.9
1.0
1.960
1.000
24.310
25.346
8.508
0
((7
7-0
Deflections (mm)
1
x 106
1st
integral
2nd integral
Correction
Deflection
103
0
0.1
1.000 1.960
0
1.036
0
0.363
0
8.871
- 8.508
0.2 0.3
3.624 4.485
4.971
2.990
5.828
1.772
4.858
17.742
26.613
-15.970 -21.755
t()
0.4
9.138
12.673
10,096
17.730
35.484 44.356 53.227

62.098
-25.388
-26.626 -25.388 -21.755
5.130
4.971
16.208
27.838
40.342
4.485
19.518
(DD
Maximum deflection at mid-span

atct
= 26.6 mm
E
span 263
span = < limit of

250
28 mm
E
10.1.4
Simplified approach
The procedure for this approach is to
(1)
Calculate the maximum bending moment and the moment causing cracking Calculate the maximum deflections for the uncracked and fully cracked conditions, and use Eqn A.4.1 to assess the final maximum deflection.
c
(2)
From Section 10.1.3.2.1 the maximum bending moment M the moment causing cracking Mc = 76.7 kNm.
The maximum deflection of the uncracked section due to flexure

5w14
E()
156.8 kNm, and
at w
1
384Ec,eff II
=
=
25.6 kN/m
7.0 m
7.8 kN/mm2
Ec,eff
= =
II
7535 x 106 mm4
Therefore
a
I
The maximum deflection of the cracked section due to flexure

5 w14
an
Therefore
aII
Final maximum deflection due to flexure
.4III
5x25.6x74x
384 x 7.8 x
103
1012
=
106
x 7535 x
13.6 mm
384Ec,ettlu
5448 x 106 mm4
5x25.6x74x1012
384 x 7.8 x
103
x 5448. x
=
106
18.8 mm
aII + (1
1
a,
r
A4.3(2)
Eqn A.4.1
0102
)2
(_M_
0.5
(J)
Therefore
a
It
must be appreciated that the deflection calculated above is due to flexure due to shrinkage must also be assessed. The shrinkage curvature at mid-span from Section 10.1.3.2
only. The additional deflection
rcs
acs
1.563
C))
atot
This figure is close to the rigorously assessed value of 26.6 mm.
10.1.5 Alternative
An alternative simplified approach, which directly takes account of shrinkage, is given in BS 81100.
The procedure here is to calculate the total curvature at one point, generally the point of maximum moment. Then, assuming the shape of the curvature diagram to be the same as the shape of the bending moment diagram, the deflection is given by
a
O-o
Kl
_
1
n':7
where
K is a factor
For a simply supported beam with uniformly distributed load
L'2
1
1.0
0.5
176.7
I2
156.8
0.88
(0.88
18.8) +
(1
0.88)
13.6
18.2 mm
x 10-6 rad./mm
l2
1.563 x 10-6
8
72
106
8 f BSI
=
18.2 + 9.6
9.6 mm
a + acs
27.8 mm
simplified approach
BS 8110: Part 2 Section 3
rtot
BS 8110: Part 2 3.7.2
(r)
dependent upon the shape of the being moment diagram.
Eqn
11
K
Total
0.104
curvature at mid-span, from Section 10.1.3.2

1
BS 8110: Part 2 3.7.2
5.130 x 10-6 rad./mm
Table 3.1
riot
Therefore maximum deflection at mid-span
atot
0.104
72
x 5.130 =
26.2 mm
E
Again this is close to the rigorously assessed value.
10.1.6 Comparison
with span/effective depth ratio
The procedure for limiting deflections by use of span/effective depth ratios is set out in EC2 Section 4.4.3.
For the example considered
A s, req
P
2392 mm2
100As,prov
A s,prov
100
2410 mm2 2410
0.37%
bd
1650 x 390
Therefore the concrete is lightly stressed, p

(L]
<_
0.5%
4.4.3.2(5)(c)
The NADM introduces a category of nominally reinforced concrete corresponding to p = 0.15%
NAD 6.4(e)
Basic span/effective depth ratio for a simply supported beam, interpolating for = 0.37%
I
28
NAD
Table 7
4.4.3.2(3)
For flanged beams where b/b, > 3.0 the basic span/effective depth ratio should be multiplied by a factor of 0.8
The span/effective depth ratios given in NAD Table 7 are based on a maximum service stress in the reinforcement in a cracked section of 250 N/mm2. The tabulated values should be multiplied by the factor of 2501as for other stress levels, where as is the service stress at the cracked section under the frequent load combination. As a conservative assumption the Code states that the factor may be taken as
250
as
400
yk(As, reg )
A s p rov
,
Therefore, for this example, allowable span/effective depth ratio

I
d
I
28 x 0 8
.
400
460 x 2392/2410) (
l
19 6
.
d
If
(allowable)
19.6
>
(actual)
7000
390
180
the span/effective depth ratio is modified using the service stress in the reinforcement as calculated in Section 10.1.3.2.1 but adjusted for the frequent load combination
aS
188.5
x 31.4/25.6
231 N/mm2
(allowable)
28 x 0.8 x
2310
21.6 > 18.0 (actual)
m00
(Nil
.C.
CAD
,,a^)
It can be seen from this example that whilst the span/effective depth ratio based on the calculated steel service stress suggests that the deflection should be well within the prescribed limits, the deflection from the rigorous and simplified analysis proves to be much nearer to the limit of span/250.
,--.
This is due to the contribution to the deflection from shrinkage, which in this example is approximately a third of the total deflection.
30'=
The values of shrinkage strain given in EC2 Table 3.4 relate to concrete having a plastic consistence of classes S2 and S3 as specified in ENV 206(6). For concrete of class S1 and class S4 the values given in the Table should be multiplied by 0.7 and 1.2 respectively.
Table 4 of ENV 206 categorises the class in relation to slump as given in Table 10.3.
C'7
000
_.C
3.1.2.5.5(4) ENV 206

7.2.1
Table 10.3
Class
S1
Slump classes
Slump (mm)
10
(O
ENV 206
7.2.1
Table 4
40 90
S2 S3
S4
50 -
100 - 150
>_
160
Thus for classes S2 and S3 the slump may vary between 50 mm and 150 mm. It is not logical that mixes with this variation of slump, and hence w/c ratio, should have a standard value of shrinkage strain.
If the values in EC2 Table 3.4 are assumed to relate to the median slump for classes S2 and S3 of 100 mm, then the values for slumps of 40 mm to 100 mm should be multiplied by a factor between 0.7 and 1.0 and values for slumps of 100 mm to 160 mm should be multiplied by a factor between 1.0 and 1.2.
v0)
As most normal mixes will have a slump in the order of 50 mm the values of shrinkage strain for the example considered would be:
0.60x
x 10-) x 0.75 =
ADD
3(D
10
0.45 x 10-3
BS 8110: Part 2 7.4 Figure 7.2
This figure relates more closely to the value which would be given in BS 8110, for the same example, of 0.4 x 10-3.
For the example considered, the calculated deflection due to shrinkage from the rigorous assessment would be
9.1
x 0.75
6.8 mm
and the total deflection from the rigorous assessment would be

=
atot
26.6
9.1 + 6.8
24.3 mm
This is well within the limit of
span
28 mm
250
218
10.2 Cracking
Check by calculation that the longitudinal reinforcement in the reinforced concrete wall section shown in Figure 10.2 is sufficient to control cracking due to restraint of intrinsic deformation resulting in pure tension.
r
0
T12- 125
T16- 200
200
Figure 10.2 Wall section
10.2.1 Design data

Concrete strength class is C30/37.
Cover to reinforcement
High bond bars with
vk
=
=
35 mm
460 N/mm2
NAD Table 6
Exposure class 2(a)
10.2.2 Calculation method

Requirements for the control of cracking are given in EC2 Section 4.4.2. Crack control is normally achieved by the application of simple detailing rules.
The procedure for the calculation of crack widths is first to calculate the stress and hence the strain in the reinforcement, taking into account the bond properties of the bars and the duration of loading. Next, the average final crack spacing dependent on the type, size and disposition of the reinforcement and the form of strain distribution is established.
-s;
(CD
O=-(D
(/)
The design crack width may then be obtained and compared with the limiting design crack width. In the absence of specific requirements, a limiting crack width of 0.3 mm will generally be satisfactory for reinforced concrete members in buildings with respect to both appearance and durability.
(OD
4.4.2.1(6)
10.2.3 Check by calculation

10.2.3.1 Calculation Steel stress:
a
S
of steel stress and strain

kckct,e0Act
4.4.2.2(3)
AS
(CD
Eqn 4.78
where
AS
= =
area of reinforcement within the tensile zone 905 x 2

=
1810 mm2/m
Act
= =
area of concrete within tensile zone

1000 x 200
200 x 103 mm2

of
kc
a coefficient taking account

1.0
stress distribution
for pure tension
=
=
a coefficient allowing for the effect of non-uniform self-equilibrating
stresses
0.8 for tensile stresses due to restraint of intrinsic deformations
(h
ct.eff
<_
'gin
300 mm)
tensile strength of concrete effective at first cracking

3.8 N/mm2 (taking
fotk 0.95
but see Section 10.2.3.4)
3.1.2.4(3)
Table
Therefore
1.0
as
3.1
x 0.8 x 3.8 x 200 x

1810
103
336 N/mm2
E
Mean strain:
Esm
_s
ES
0102
asr
vs
4.4.2.4(2)
Eq n 4.81
where
ES
= =
modulus of elasticity of steel

200 kN/mm2
3.2.4.3(1) of
E
a,
a2
= = =
a coefficient taking account of bond properties

1.0 for high
the bars
bond bars
of load duration

0.5
C))
or
the stress in the reinforcement based on a cracked section under the load causing first cracking
vs
for intrinsic imposed deformation
in+
c)
Therefore 336
(1
200 x
0.5)
8.4 x 10-4
103
10.2.3.2 Calculation of crack spacing

The average final crack spacing
Srm
50 + 0.25 k1k2 (Pr "r1
4.4.2.4(3)
Eqn 4.82
where
k1

0.8 for high bond bars
of
the bond properties of the bar
20
in accordance with EC2 Section 4.4.2.2.(3).

k2

1.0
O"a
In the case of imposed deformations, k, should be multiplied by k, with
k being
of
the form of strain distribution

As
Ac,eff
for pure tension
Pr
the effective reinforcement ratio

the effective tension area.
r'_
Auff =
tension reinforcement to a depth of 2.5 times the distance from the tension face to the controid of the reinforcement or, for members in tension, half the actual member thickness, whichever is the lesser. This is calculated as:
2.5
x (35 +
1212)
103
>
h12
CD)
The effective tension area is generally the area of concrete surrounding the
100 mm
Therefore
Ac0 =
Pr
III
1000 x 100
100
x 100
103 nlm2
1810
X 103
0.009
50+(0.25x
0.8x0.8x 1.0x12)
0.009
Srm
263 mm
10.2.3.3 Calculation of crack width

The design crack width
wk
OSrmEsm
4.4.2.4
Eq n 4.80
where a
a coefficient relating the average crack width to the design value

1.3 for restraint cracking in of 300 mm or less.
members with a minimum dimension
Therefore
wk
1.3
x 263 x
8.4
x 10-4 =
0.29
<
0.3 mm (limit)
10.2.3.4 Concluding remark
The Code suggests a minimum value of 3 N/mm2 be taken when the time of cracking cannot be confidently predicted as being less than 28 days.
003
(S-W
the class specified. Consequently, unless strict site control is exercised, it would be prudent to adopt the apparently conservative figures given in EC2 Table 3.1.
9'C
Cteff seem high, it is difficult at the design stage to assess accurately the as placed concrete strength because this often exceeds
(fl
Whilst the values given for
11z
DD))
11
DEEP BEAMS
11.1
Introduction
The design of deep beams may be based on analyses applying:
(a) linear elastic analysis;
2.5.1.1(5)
(b) an equivalent truss consisting of concrete struts and arches with reinforcement, all preferably following the elastic field;
(c) non-linear analysis.
details of the analysis model and, therefore, much of the design are not given and it is left for the Engineer to satisfy the principal Code requirements. This can be achieved using CIRIA Guide 2, The design of deep beams in reinforced concrete("), which also provides recommendations on the detailed analysis and design. The Guide was written for use with the then current British Standard CP 11019).
Here it has been assumed that a complete design to the CIRIA Guide would be carried out and then checks made to demonstrate compliance with the specific clauses for deep beams in EC2.
highlight some of the differences between EC2 and design to the CIRIA Guide, the example in Appendix B of the Guide has been used.
To
A small
number of EC2 clauses have been identified as relating specifically to
deep beams:
(a) 2.5.2.1(2)
(b) 2.5.3.7.3
(c) 4.4.2.3(4)
(d) 5.4.5
definition of deep beams

analysis modelling skin reinforcement
reinforcement detailing
11.2 Example
proposed arrangement of walls and columns is shown in Figure 11.1. Loading details are presented in Figure 11.2. It is intended to justify a design using the Simple Rules of Section 2 of the CIRIA Guide.
A
_G)
The beam is a flat vertical plate and the thickness is small compared with other dimensions.
3((0
In EC20)
o(
There are two loads which may be defined as concentrated and no indirect loads or supports.
In EC2
depth.
CIRIA Guide 2 classifies deep beams as 'Beams with span/depth ratios of less than 2 for single span beams or less than 2.5 for multi span beams', thus giving an extended range of elements to be designed as deep beams in comparison with EC2.
33-
(c1
2.5.3.7.3
>`N
a beam is classified as a deep beam
(On
CIRIA
Guide 2
CI.2.1.1(1) C1.2.1.1(4) C1.2.1.1(5)
if
the span is less than twice the
2.5.2.1(2)
min
4'1
DEEP BEAMS
200
14.220
11
- 0
1800
900
20
h*-
I I I
300
I I
I I
300
Iv
10.680
I
300
300
300
4 I-y
TTT,
A
250-
250 5000
1000
8
1
-1
1000
ELEVATION
Figure
11.1
Structural arrangement
DEEP BEAMS
57.6 kN/m dead load
475 kN dead load
475 kN
V
14.220
10.680
+44.0 kN/m live load
dead load
157.6 kN/m dead
load+44.0 kN/m
live load
I
7.140
Load between faces of supports
3-in
included
bending moment
_I
57.6 kN/m dead load+ 44.0 kN/m
live load
178.6 kN/m self weight + 57.6 kN/m dead load + 44.0 kN/m
3.600
live load
7_
Figure 11.2 Loading details
11.2.1
Durability
For dry environment, exposure class is
1.
Table 4.1
ENV 206 Table NA.1
Minimum concrete strength class is C25/30.

The CIRIA Guide example uses
^^D
fcu
30 N/mm2
Use C25/30 for design to EC2 to keep examples broadly consistent.
Minimum cement content and water cement ratio
ENV 206
Minimum cover to reinforcement Assume nominal aggregate size

Assume maximum bar size
Nominal cover
=
= =
>_
15 mm
Table 3
NAD
20 mm
20 mm 20 mm
Table 6
NAD 6.4(a)
DEEP BEAMS
Use 25 mm nominal cover
Check requirements for fire resistance to BS 8110: Part
2(2).
NAD 6.1(a)
11.2.2 Materials
vk
460 N/mm2
NAD 6.3(a)
Concrete strength class C25/30, nominal aggregate size 20 mm
11.2.3 Effective dimensions of beam

Effective span (0
CZ-
l0
+ (c1/2
<_
0.110)
+ (c2/2
CIRIA Guide 2
<_
0.110)
CI.2.2.1
5000 +
500
2
0.1
x 5000 =
5750 mm
Note that EC2 effective spans typically come to the mid-point of the supports.
Active height (ha)
h
Figure 2.4
lesser of h and
10920
>
5750
mm
Therefore
ha
5750 mm
= 300 mm
E
Thickness of beam
This thickness is used to be consistent with the CIRIA Guide 2 example. It will be necessary under EC2 to demonstrate that the required reinforcement can be accommodated within this width. The effective dimensions of the beam are shown in Figure 11.3
Height of beam h=10920
Effective
span 1= 5750
1i
Clear span lo= 5000
I
1
1000
Maximum effective
I
c2= 2000
support width
0-2 to
Figure 11.3
Effective dimensions of beam
DEEP BEAMS
11.2.4 Elastic
stability
slenderness limits
(<D
The CIRIA Guide Simple Rules assume no reduction of capacity due to the slenderness of the section or to lack of adequate restraint. This is valid if every panel can be defined as braced and not slender.
:.=
In the examination of this condition, the CIRIA Guide states that the effective height of each panel is taken to be 1.2 x the shortest distance between centres of parallel lateral restraints (where there are effective lateral restraints at all four edges of the panel) or as 1.5 x the distance between the centres of the parallel lateral restraints (where one or two opposite edges of the panel are free). When both rotational and lateral movements are restrained the effective height may be taken as the clear distance between restraints.
In EC2
the demonstration is not quite as straightforward.

o_0
4.3.5.3.2
The floors are assumed to be held in position horizontally by an adequate bracing system and are `braced' in accordance with EC2. The floor slabs are monolithic with the wall so the effective height, 10, is calculated from the relevant clauses in EC2 referring to columns. However the design example does not give any information on the adjacent structure so kA cannot be calculated but 0 = 0/1oo cannot exceed 1.0 and therefore
x-307
oo
(Q'
(1)
4.3.5.3.5
Eqn 4.60 Figure 4.27
to
<_
1.0
x 3540 =
3540 mm
4.3.5.3.5(1)
The wall is considered slender if
exceeds the greater of 25 or 15/

C-,
vU
4.3.5.3.5(2)
i
X
radius of gyration
=
=
300/f12
41.2
86 mm
=
=
lli 0
3540/86
VU
Nsd/Ao cd
NSd
say in lower storey (bottom loads not considered)
=
=
57.6x3x1.35+44x3x
654 kN/m
654 x
103
1.5
+ 2 x 475 x 1.35/5.75
yU
1000 x 300 x 25/1.5
0.13
15/U
41.6
>
41.2
The wall is not slender
11.2.5 Loading
Loading details are shown in Figure 11.2 and evaluated in Tables
11.1
and 11.2.
DEEP BEAMS
Table
Total
11.1
Characteristic loads
Q
(kN ,
loads
Slab at level 14.220
CIRIA Guide 2 CI.2.3

CI.2.3.1
(}Z
44.0'
44.0" 44.0 44.0
0.3 x 10.92 x 24
10.680 7.140 3.600 Self-weight =
57.6' 57.6'
57.6 57.6 78.6
(1')
(!')
176.0
00'
Point loads at level 14.220; 2 @ 475 kN", which are considered as dead loads Vertical forces applied above a level of 3.30 + 0.75 x 5.75
considered as top loading and loads below as hanging loads

considered as top loads
309.0
7.620 are
CIRIA Guide 2
CI.2.3.1(1)
In EC2 differing CIRIA Guide 2
ryF
values produce slightly different design forces to those in

yQ
tic
1.35,
Ultimate distributed top load

yeGk + ryQQk
Table 11.2
Hanging loads
Q (kNk
44.0
Loads applied within the depth of the beam
Slab at level 7.140 Self-weight
Loads applied to the bottom of the beam

E
Slab at level 3.600

Total
hanging load
Rules in the Guide.
design to EC2 where different yF values and concrete strength classes are used, the check for load intensity might reasonably be made against
To allow for
0.2 x ratio of yF values x

0.2 x
(11.35
(fcu/
ok)
fck
20
(
)
ck
= =
0.23
k
x 475
=
641 kN
Ultimate concentrated top load
1.35
Allowing for 45 spread of load through thickness of slab

Load intensity
=
641
1031(800
x 300)
2.67 N/mm2
-0_
The CIRIA Guide Simple Rules apply where the intensity of any load is less than 0.2f and the load is applied over a length which exceeds 0.21. More intense loads and those applied over shorter lengths are considered to be cu `concentrated', in which case reference should be made to the Supplementary
,-+
L()
1.5
1.5
x 88 +
1.35
x 115.2
288 kN/m
G (kNk
57.6 78.6 136.2
44.0
44.0
57.6
88.0
193.8
CIRIA
CO)
Guide 2 CI.2.3.1(5)
(3)
DEEP BEAMS
This loading is well below 0.23f k but, because the length of the loaded area is less than 0.21 = 0.2 x 5750 = 1150 mm, some additional reinforcement may be required and must be calculated using the Supplementary Rules in the CIRIA Guide.
11.2.6 Moment and shears

11.2.6.1 Reactions due to loads on clear span
CIRIA Guide 2 CI.2.3.2

fl-
The arrangement of loading and supports assumed for calculating the bending moments is shown in Figure 11.4. These loads are for the fully loaded system.
1.35x 475 kN
15X
RA=1944 kN
250
I
176 kN/m
1-35X 309 kN/m
ARB=2103
4000
I
kN
1000
1500
Figure 11.4
Total
E
loads at ultimate limit state
Reactions from total loads are

RA =
1944 kN,
RB
2103 kN
Shear forces must be considered for top- and bottom-load cases separately. Consider the bottom-loaded case shown in Figure 11.5.
Total bottom load
1.35 x 193.8 + 1.5 x 88

rte)' Lc')
393.6 kN/m
Reactions from bottom applied loads are

RAb
1027 kN,
RBb
941 kN
RA=1027
krN,
1-35X 1938 kN/m

R
B= 941 kN
250
5000
500
Figure 11.5
Hanging loads at ultimate limit state
Reactions from top loads are thus

RAC
= =
1944
RBI
2103
1027
941
= =
917 kN
1162 kN
11.2.6.2 Additional shear forces due to loads over supports
Loads acting over the effective support width apply an additional shear force to the critical section of the beam (i.e., at the support face). In this example, one of the point loads acts at the centre line of the actual support, B, as shown in Figure 11.6.
CIRIA
Guide 2
C1.2.3.2
228
DEEP BEAMS
641 kN 2000
Active height of beam

h a =
5750
Support A
Support
P I
- T
f
500
10 =
5000
'10001
2000
Effective support width 0210
Figure 11.6 Additional load at support B
Since the effective support width is half the actual width, the additional shear force
=
=
0.5
x 641 x
(ha
0.214/ha
320.5(5.75
0.2
x 5.0)/5.75 =
265 kN
11.2.6.3 Total shear forces

At support A
Top loading
(VA)
=
= =
917 kN
Bottom loading (VAd

Tota
l
1027 kN
(VA)
1944 kN
At support B
Top loadin g
(VB)
1162 + 265
941 kN
Z
=
1427 kN
Bottom lo ading (VBd

Tota l
(VB)
=
=
2368 kN
11.2.6.4 Maximum bending moment

Position of zero shear (where x is distance from face of support A) is given by
1944
(1.5
x 176 +
2.85 m
1.35
x 309)x =
Therefore x
1944 (2.85 + 0.25)
681
2_852
3261 kNm
DEEP BEAMS
11.2.7 Strength design

Bending capacity check in accordance with CIRIA Guide 2
1/h
a
CIRIA Guide 2 C1.2.4 &

2.4.1
< 1.5
Hence there is no need to check the compression in the concrete and the area of steel required may be calculated from a lever arm given as
z
=
0.21
+ 0.4ha
3450 mm
is no difference in using EC2 equations.
For the reinforcement

Lyk
'yd
area there
L(O
_ 460
1.15
400 N/mm2
Table 2.3
'Ys
A
s
M
ydz
3261
106
400 x 3450
2363 mm2
This is 15% less than CIRIA Guide 2, predominantly due to a higher yield strength reinforcement used in this example, but also in part because of lower yF values used in EC2.
11.2.8 Detailing of principal bending moment reinforcement
06070
CIRIA Guide 2 states 'Reinforcement is not to be curtailed in the span and may be distributed over a depth of 0.2ha. A minimum steel percentage in relation to the local area of concrete in which it is embedded is given in Table 1'.
=2.0
CIRIA Guide 2
C1.2.4.1
C1.2.6.2
Minimum steel percentage
0.71%
A maximum bar spacing for a maximum crack width of 0.3 mm is given in Table 2 of the CIRIA Guide.
Spacing
<_
165 mm,
for b
300 mm
Reinforcement may be distributed over depth

i.e.
minimum number of bars in face
1150
165
0.2
x 5750 = 1150 mm
7
Use 14T16 for main tension reinforcement

AS
2814 mm2
> 2363 mm2 required

E
...............
OK
EC2 requires for beams a maximum bar size or a maximum bar spacing to
limit
3
4.4.2.3
4.4.2.3(3)
cracking under quasi-permanent loading.

= = =
Gk +
Quasi-permanent loading
Ratio to ultimate loading
Estimate of steel stress
0.30 k
0.56
0. 56yd
(f)
As.reg
A s,prov
188 N/mm2
DEEP BEAMS
........................... Maximum bar spacing is 250 (pure flexure) > 165 mm ...........
Maximum bar size is 25 > 16 mm
OK OK
Table 4.11 Table 4.12
Note that only one of these conditions needs to be met.
Guide 2, the bars must be anchored to develop 80% of the maximum ultimate force beyond the face of the support and 20% of the maximum ultimate force at or beyond a point 0.210 from the face of the support, or at or beyond the far face of the support, whichever is less. The main reinforcement must be anchored so that the concrete within the area of support relied upon for bearing
In CIRIA
CIRIA
Guide 2
CI.2.4.1
is
adequately confined.
CAN
5-0
EC2 for deep beams requires that the reinforcement, corresponding to the ties
(D_
5.4.5(1)
considered in the design model, should be fully anchored beyond the nodes by bending up the bars, by using U-hoops or by anchorage devices, unless a sufficient length is available between the node and the end of the beam permitting an anchorage length of lb,net.
The EC2 requirements are clearly more onerous.
Support
anchorage
aalbAs reg
(L)
v0)
con
lbmet
A s,pr0v
b,min
5.2.3.4.1 Eqn 5.4
where
a
fbd
= =
0.7 for curv ed bars with si de cover
>_
30
Table 5.3
2.7 N/mm2 for good bond in bottom ha lf of pour
lb
-(
=
Yd 4 fbd l
=
4
( 400)
370
Eqn 5.3
2.7
Asreq
2363 mm2,
As,prov
2814 mm2
Therefore
14net
0.7
x (37 x
16)
2363
2814
348 mm
There is insufficient distance to accommodate such an anchorage length beyond the centre-line of the column.
If U-bars or loops are provided, the minimum internal diameter of the bend needs to satisfy the requirement for curved bars. This is an indirect check on the crushing of the concrete inside the bend and the tabulated value could be multiplied by As,regIA,,prov-
m-0
BCD
NAD
Table 8
Minimum internal diameter of bend
13
208 mm
Note that detailing.

At
(cu
it
is
necessary to check that sufficient space is available in the final

will
support B a straight anchorage and EC2 requirements.
be sufficient to meet both CIRIA Guide 2
MoD
VIN
_(n
a_)
E E
-t6
(Y)
DEEP BEAMS
11.2.9 Minimum longitudinal steel

CIRIA Guide 2 refers to the British Standard CP 110, and EC2 will be slightly more onerous.
For beams generally
As
-9
0.6btdl
ck
0.0015btd
5.4.2.1.1
Basing the flexural steel on the active height assumed for the beam design
AS
0.0015 x 300 x 5750
2588 mm2
5.4.5(2)
Deep beams should normally be provided with a distributed reinforcement near both sides, the effect of each being equivalent to that of an orthogonal mesh with a reinforcement ratio of at least 0.15% in both directions.
AS
0.003
x 300 x 1000 = 900 mm2/m

4.4.2.3(4)
This reinforcement should also satisfy the requirement that beams with a total depth of 1.0 m or more, where the main reinforcement is concentrated in only a small proportion of the depth, should be provided with additional skin reinforcement to control cracking on the side faces of the beam. This reinforcement should be evenly distributed between the level of the tension steel and the neutral axis, and should be located within the links.
w-m-wm=
w0-D0
A _S
=
Act
Cep
4.4.2.2(3)
kckct,eff/as
`-G
Eqn 4.78
where
kc
0.4 assuming value for bending is to be used
k
ct,eff
aS
=
= =
0.5
3 N/mm2 using suggested value
fyk
4.4.2.3(4)
460 N/mm2
4.4.2.3(4)
Hence
A
S
0.4
x 0.5 x 3/460
0.0013
Act
The requirements of either Table 4.11 or Table 4.12 of EC2 should be met.
Assume steel stress
(2) x value for main bars = 94

E
NIA
N/mm2
E
4.4.2.3(4) Table 4.11
Maximum bar size

Omax
32 mm
E
Maximum bar spacing in 'pure tension' condition

Smax
Table 4.12
4.4.2.3(4)
200 mm
Use T10 @ 150 mm crs (EF) above level of main reinforcement
DEEP BEAMS
1048
> 900
m m2/m
...........................
OK
11.2.10 Shear design

CIRIA Guide 2 separates top these in different ways.
In
and bottom loads and deals with the design
of
CIRIA
Guide 2
C1.2.4.2
principle the bottom loads require vertical tension hangers to suspend the loads above the active beam height, ha, with horizontal web reinforcement needed in the area of the supports.
The top-load shear calculations include taking into account any additional shear force induced by top loads over the supports.
(7D
Under the simple design rules the top-load shear capacity is not improved by web reinforcement.
-a
orthogonal pattern of web reinforcement not less than the minimum required for walls in BS 8110 is intended. This is augmented for bottom loads and in the area of the supports.
A nominal,
(D
'-'
an
The detail of the CIRIA Guide calculation is not repeated here and reference should be made to the original document. The reinforcement details are shown
in Figures 11.7 and 11.8.
COD
CTS
CIRIA
Guide 2
Figures 93
&13
bars
L
i
d
0
w LL
150
L
i
T10- 150
T10-
O
F-
150 U-bars
t o N n
F-
J N
r c 1 N r
5OT16-150EF
I I
34T16-150
14 1
1
- bars
150 U-bars
LL
24T16-
24T
T10O
U-bars
L
Bars continued through from column and tied to vertical
1500
5000
reinforcement
2000
Figure 11.7 Arrangement of reinforcement
233
DEEP BEAMS
Hanger bar given a full tension anchorage length

above
d._
ho
ha
Full
tension lap
Hanger bar anchored as

a
link around main

','
bars
Figure 11.8
Detail at bottom of wall

4.3.2.2(7)
Using the standard method in EC2

Vsd
2368 kN maximum at support B

TRdk(1.2
VRd1
40pl)b,d
Eqn 4.18
Table 4.8
TRd
0.30 N/mm2
As1
= =
=
0.15%A,, therefore
1
pr
0.0015
asd
> 0.6m
0.2ha, say
10920
0.2
x 5750 =
t[)
9770 mm
bW
Therefore
VRd1
300 mm
E
0.3 (1.2 + 40
x 0.0015)300 x 9770 x 10-3 =
1108 kN
Vsd
>
=
VRd1'
therefore shear reinforcement needed

+
Vwd,
VRd3
Vd
where
Vd
VRd1
Eqn 4.22
Therefore
V
d >_
2368
1108
1260 kN
A SW
1260 x 103
with
fywd
400 N/mm2
s
>_
Eqn 4.23
0.9dywd
0.36 mm2/mm
E
E E
Al
DEEP BEAMS
Where the load is not acting at the top of a beam, suspension reinforcement should be provided to transfer the load to the top.
4.3.2.4.1P(3)
The bottom load identified previously Area of hanger steel needed with
Ash
= =
393.6 kN/m
vd
400 N/mm2
E
393.6
= 0.99 mm2/mm
400
Use T16 @ 150 mm crs. (EF) when hangers are needed
AS
S
2x201
150
= 2.68
> 0.36 + 0.99 = 1.35 mm2/mm

E
...
OK
Use T10 @ 150 mm2(EF) elsewhere
As
2 x 78
1.04
>
2 0.36 mm /mm
150
...............
OK
Minimum shear reinforcement with

pW
YWk
460 N/mm2
Table 5.5
A SW
s
0.0012bW
0.36 mm2/mm
it
.....................
OK
For heavily loaded deep beams shear.
may prove more complicated to justify the
11.2.11
Further guidance
has further guidance for reinforcement in support regions, under concentrated loads and around holes in beams.
CIRIA Guide 2
CIRIA
Guide 2
Supplementary design rules are also provided for deep beams that include arrangements excluded by the simplified method.
It is because of the extent of this information that the initial suggestion was made, that a complete design to the CIRIA Guide is undertaken and then a parallel design to EC2 is performed as appropriate, to demonstrate compliance with the individual clauses.
c.:
(J1
-Q>
12 LOAD COMBINATIONS
12.1
Introduction
considers all loads as variables in time and space and applies statistical principles to arrive at the loads for design. There is an underlying assumption that the basic loads themselves are described in statistical terms. Thus, when variable loads of different origins, for example superimposed loads on floors and wind loads on the faces of buildings, have to be considered acting together in a load case, the probability of both loads not being at their full characteristic values is allowed for by multipliers called factors. These factors too are derived statistically and values are given in EC1(20) and the NAD to EC2(1).
EC20)
C")
can
ACT
Q"
Thus when a number of variable loads have to be considered simultaneously in any load case, each load is treated in turn as the primary load and others are considered secondary. The primary load is applied at its characteristic value multiplied by the partial safety factor. All secondary loads are applied at their characteristic values multiplied by the partial safety factor and further multiplied by a factor. These factors vary depending upon the limit state and the type of loading being considered.
go-
a<<
Mathematically the design load for ultimate limit state may be represented as:
E
'YGjGk,
y0,1Qk,1
primary load
EryO,iOo,i Qk,i
secondary load
While the above procedure is the general approach, EC2 also provides simplified rules:
(a)
where only one variable load occurs the design load

= E
'YG,Gk1
+ 1.5Qk
(b)
when more than one variable load occurs the design load E yG;Gk + 1.35E Qk
>t
i
It
is important to note that this Code permits
in
the use of either approach although some circumstances the general method may result in higher loading.
In practice the simplified procedure will be perfectly satisfactory for most
situations and could be used.
The following examples are given to illustrate the thinking behind the general approach and indicate where the general approach may be required.
Usually, when dead loads produce a favourable effect, yG can be taken as unity. However, if the variation of the magnitude of the dead load is likely to
prove sensitive then

For the particular
-yG
should be taken as 0.9.

of
case
yG
permits the use of

.O-.
continuous beams without cantilevers, the Code 1.35 for all the spans.
When calculating the loads on vertical elements of mufti-storey structures the vertical loads may be based on either:
(a) loads from (b)
beams multiplied by suitable 0 and
BCD.
yf
values; or
loads on beams multiplied by yf values and a global reduction in loading applied using the procedure given in BS 6399(21). This is the approach in the NAD.
(<D
O-
O
_00
YS?
LOAD COMBINATIONS
12.2 Example
frame
For the frame shown in Figure 12.1 identify the various load arrangements, to check the overall stability. Assume office use for this building.
Note that the load arrangements for the design of elements could be different.
Figure 12.1
Frame configuration
example
12.2.1 Notation
Characteristic loads/m
Gkr
dead
dead
Gkf
Qkr
roof
floor
imposed
Qkf
imposed
- roof - floor
roof or floor
Characteristic load/frame
Wk
wind
12.2.2 Load cases

ti?
example
Fundamental load combination to be used is

+
E^tG,jGk.l
2.3.2.2P(2)
ry0,1Qk,1
Eq n 2.7(a)
>1ry0,iwo,iQk,i
Take
yG,inf
=
=
COQ
As the stability will be sensitive to a possible variation of dead loads, necessary to allow for this as given in EC2 Section 2.3.2.3(P3).
A<7
it will
be
0.9, 1.5
7G,sup
1.35
Table 2.2
70
NAD
Table
1
0.7 for imposed loads (offices)
LOAD COMBINATIONS
12.2.2.1 Load case
example
Treat the wind load as the primary load (see Figure 12.2).
Figure 12.2
Load case
example
12.2.2.2 Load case 2
example
Treat the imposed load on the roof as the primary load (see Figure 12.3).
Figure 12.3
Load case 2
example
LOAD COMBINATIONS
example
Treat the imposed load on the floors as the primary load (see Figure 12.4).
Figure 12.4 Load case 3
example
example
Consider the case without wind loading treating the imposed floor loads as the primary load (see Figure 12.5).
example
239
LOAD COMBINATIONS
example
Consider the case without wind loading treating the imposed roof load as the primary load (see Figure 12.6).
example
Note: When the wind loading is reversed, another set of arrangements will need to be considered. However, in problems of this type, the critical arrangements are likely to be found intuitively rather than by directly searching through all the theoretical possibilities.
12.3 Example 2
of
continuous beam
`j)
Identify the various load arrangements for the ultimate limit state for the design
the four-span continuous beam shown
in
Figure 12.7.
Assume that spans 1-2 and 2-3 are subject to domestic use and spans 3-4 and 4-5 are subject to parking use.
Domestic use
Parking use
Figure 12.7
Beam configuration
example 2
LOAD COMBINATIONS
12.3.1
Notation
Gk
Qk1
characteristic dead load/m characteristic imposed load/m (domestic use) characteristic imposed load/m (parking use)
0Q
12.3.2 Load cases
example 2
c-"
Fundamental load combination to be used is

E îGjGkJ +
yQ,1Qk,1
2.3.2.2P(2)
+ E1'Yoj
ro,iQk,i
Eq n 2.7(a)
2.3.2.3(4)
For beams without cantilevers the same value of self-weight may be applied to all spans, i.e., 1.35Gk'
The load cases to be considered for the imposed loads are

(a) (b)
2.5.1.2(4)
alternate spans loaded; and
adjacent spans loaded.
LOAD COMBINATIONS
The various load arrangements are shown
in
Figure 12.8.
1.35Gk
A
Note
Load case A above should be combined
with cases B-J
below as necessary
1.5Q
B
kk11
0.7
(1.5Qk2)
Max.
+ve moment
in
1-2 and max. col. moment at

1.5Qk2
0.5 (1.5Qk1)
C
Max.
+ve moment
in
3-4 and max. col. moments at
and 4
0.7
(
4-7
1.5Q k1
Max.
+ve moment in 2-3 and max. col. moment at

E
1.5Q k2
and
0-5
E
(
1'SQk2
Max.
+ve moment in 4-5 and max. col. moment at

1.5Qk1
Max.
-ve moment at
1-SQk1
G
0-7 (1.5Qk2
-'9
I
I
3
(
Max.-ve moment at
see case
H
(
also
1
0.5
H
1-5Qk1
1-5(1 k2
f
Max. -ve moment at
3
(see case
also
Max.
-ve moment at
E
Figure 12.8 Load cases
example 2
242
LOAD COMBINATIONS
12.4 Example 3
continuous beam
For the continuous beam shown in Figure 12.9, identify the critical load arrangements for the ultimate limit state. Assume that the beam is subject to distributed dead and imposed loads, and a point load at the end of the cantilever arising from the dead load of the external wall.
Figure 12.9 Beam configuration
example 3
12.4.1
Notation
Gk
= =
characteristic dead load/m characteristic imposed load/m characteristic point load (dead)
0k
12,4.2 Load cases
example 3
fl.
The fundamental combinations given in EC2 Section 2.3.2.2 should be used. Note that the presence of the cantilever prohibits the use of the same design
values of dead loads
in all
spans.
C/)
2.3.2.3(4)
The various load arrangements are shown
in
Figures 12.10 to 12.13.
1-35P
0.9 Gk
1-35Gk
+1-5Qk
Max.-ve moment and anchorage of top bars at

Also max. col. moment at
3
(
3
)
see F;g. 1213
also
Figure 12.10 Load case
example 3
LOAD COMBINATIONS
0.9P
1.35Gk+1.50Lk
0'9Gk
Max.-ve moment at
Figure 12.11
Load case 2
example 3
example 3
0.9P
0.9Gk
1.35Gk +1-5Qk
0.9 G k
Max.+ve moment in 2-3, max. col.moment at 2 (see Fig.12.12 also) and, possibly, max. col. moment at 3 (see Fig. 12.10 also )
Figure 12.13
Load case 4
example 3
LOAD COMBINATIONS
12.5 Example 4
A
tank
water tank, as shown in Figure 12.14, of depth H (in metres) has an operating depth of water h (in metres). Calculate the design lateral loads for the ultimate
limit state.
Figure 12.14
Tank configuration
example 4
According to the draft EC1, earth loads are permanent loads. The same reasoning can be applied to lateral pressures caused by water. The NAD for EC2 confirms this. Design can therefore be based on the pressure diagram shown in Figure 12.15.
NAD 6.2(c)
Figure 12.15 Design load based on operating water depth

CAD
example 4
Consideration should also be given to the worst credible water load, which in this case will correspond to a depth of H, i.e., water up to the top of the tank. EC2 permits the variation of the partial safety factor yG j depending on the knowledge of the load Gk..
F,'
co-
m-0
In this
case the alternative design loading
will
be as shown
in
Figure 12.16 Design load based on worst credible water depth
245
TIC
However, the method of establishing yG is not given. The basis adopted in BS 8110: Part 2(2) could be used and a factor of 1.15 applied instead of 1.35.
c))
CDO
Figure 12.16.
- example 4
ate)
13DESIGN OF BEAM AND COLUMN SECTIONS

13.1
Concrete grades
EC20) uses the cylinder strength,
3.1.2.4
f ck, to define the concrete strength
in design
may occasionally be necessary to use cube strengths which do not exactly correspond to one of the specified grades. In such instances a relationship is required between cylinder and cube strength in order to obtain an appropriate value for f The relationship implicit in EC2 and ENV 206(6) is given in
gym
It
ck.
-a8
equations, although the cube strength may be used for control purposes. The grade designations specify both cylinder and cube strengths in the form C cylinder strength/cube strength, for example C25/30.
Figure 13.1.
50
50/60
C45/55
40
C40/50
C35/45
/mm
C30/37
Cylinder strength
C25/30
C20/25
C12/15
10
CW-0
10
20 Cube
30
40
60
strength (N/mm2)
Figure
13.1
Relationship between cube and cylinder strength of concrete
13.2 Singly reinforced rectangular beam sections

The following equations and design tables have been derived from the assumptions given in 4.3.1 and 4.2.1.3.3(b) of the Code combined with the redistribution limits given in 2.5.3.4.2. They are entirely in accordance with EC2.
0.2
4.3.1
gin'
.9-
4.2.1.3.3 2.5.3.4.2
DESIGN OF BEAM AND COLUMN SECTIONS
13.2.1 Equations
w
for singly reinforced rectangular beam sections

Asfyk
bdfck
0.652
0.425
1.51,
xfd
1.918 w
where
M
1,
=
bd2f,;k
Table 13.1 gives w and xfd as a function of .
Table 13.1
Flexural reinforcement in singly reinforced rectangular sections.

Af
k bdfCk
(LS
bd2f Ck
0.010
0.012
xld
zld
AsfYk
xld
zld
bdf.k
0.012 0.014 0.016

0.019
0.021
0.022 0.027
0.031
0.991
0.090 0.092 0.094 0.096 0.098

0.100 0.102 0.104
0.113
0.217
0.913
0.911
0.014
0.989 0.987 0.986 0.984 0.982 0.980

0.978
0.116
0.119
0.016
0.018
0.036 0.040 0.045 0.050 0.054 0.059

LL)
0.122
0.125
0.127 0.130 0.133
0.020 0.022 0.024 0.026 0.028

0.030
0.023 0.026 0.028

0.031
0.223 0.228 0.234 0.239 0.245 0.250 0.256

0.261
0.909
0.907
0.904
0.977 0.975
0.973
0.971
0.106
0.108
0.110
0.112
0.136
0.139 0.142
0.033 0.035 0.038 0.040 0.043 0.045 0.048 0.050 0.053 0.055 0.058 0.060 0.063 0.065 0.068
LL)
0.063 0.068
0.073
0.267
0.272 0.278
0.902 0.900 0.898 0.896 0.893

0.891
T;'
0.032
0.145 0.148
0.151
a034
0.036 0.038 0.040 0.042 0.044 0.046 0.048 0.050 0.052 0.054
(!1
LL) LL)
0.077 0.082 0.087 0.092 0.096

0.101
0.969 0.967 0.965 0.963

0.961
0.114
0.116 0.118
0.154 0.157
0.284 0.289 0.295

0.301
0.889 0.887
0.120
0.884 0.882 0.880

0.877 0.875
0.873
0.122 0.124 0.126 0.128 0.130

0.132 0.134 0.136
0.160 0.163 0.166 0.169

0.172
0.307 0.313
0.319
(77
0.106
0.111
0.960 0.958
0.956 0.954 0.952 0.950 0.948
0.946
0.944
LL)
0.324
0.870
0.116
0.121
0.175 0.179 0.182
0.056 0.058 0.060 0.062 0.064 0.066
0.125 0.130
0.135
0.140
0.330 0.336 0.343 0.349

0.355
('7
0.868 0.865 0.863

0.861
LL)
(77
0.071
0.138 0.140
0.142
0.185 0.188
0.191
0.858
0.073
0.361
0.076 0.078
0.081
0.145 0.150
0.942
0.367 0.373
0.856 0.853
0.851
0.155
0.160 0.165 0.170
0.176
0.181
0.940 0.938 0.936 0.934 0.932 0.930
0.144 0.146
0.148 0.150
0.195 0.198
0.201
LL)
0.380
0.386
0.848
0.846
0.843 0.840
0.068
0.070 0.072 0.074 0.076
0.078
0.084 0.086
0.089
0.152 0.154
LL)
0.205 0.208
0.211
0.092 0.094
0.097
0.393 0.399 0.405

0.412 0.419
0.838
0.186
0.191
0.928 0.926 0.924

0.921
0.156 0.158
0.160 0.162
0.215
0.218
0.835
0.833
0.080 0.082 0.084 0.086 0.088
0.102 0.105
0.111
0.196
0.108
0.202 0.207 0.212
0.919 0.917
0.164
0.166
0.222 0.225 0.229 0.232

LL')
A??
0.100
0.425 0.432 0.439 0.446
0.830
0.827
(77
0.824 0.822
0.915
(77
(71
0 0 0
OOO ---
13.2.2 Limits to use of singly reinforced beam sections

Limits to x/d as a function of the amount of re-distribution carried out are given in EC2. These can be re-written as
(f)
2.5.3.4.2
For concrete grades

S
<_
C35/45
(x/d)lim =
0.44
1.25
For concrete grades

S
> C35/45
0.56
(X/d)lim
1.25
Equations can be derived for wlim and

of (x/d) im.
lim
E
These are
= _
'lim
for rectangular sections as a function
0.4533(x/d)limJ1
(x/d)lim/1.918
(Y)
0.4(X/d)lim]
Wlim
Table 13.2 gives values of (x/d)im, lim and wlim as a function of the amount of re-distribution carried out. EC2 states that plastic design, for example yield line analysis, can be used where x/d <_ 0.25. The limits corresponding to this value are also included in the table.
E
2.5.3.5.5
l()
(f)
Table 13.2
%
Limiting values
E
(X'd)
redistribution
lim
41'm
wlim
fok<35
0.352
0.312
fok<35
0.2336
0.2127
0.1919
0.1710
1.00
5
10 15
0.95
0.90
0.448 0.408
0.368
0.1667 0.1548
0.1423
'IA
fck<35
fck>35
0.1371
fck>35
0.1835
0.1627
0.1418
0.1210
0.1001
0.1238
0.1099
0.272
0.85 0.80 0.75

0.70
20 25
30 Plastic design
0.328 0.288
0.232
0.192
)17
0.1292
0.1155
0.1013
0.0954 0.0803 0.0647 0.0485

(17
0.248 0.208
0.25
0.152
0.112
0.0864
0.1502 0.1293 0.1084
0.0792 0.0584
0.1020
0.1303
13.3 Compression
reinforcement
in
Compression reinforcement is required amount can be calculated from

A
any section where it >
ilm.
The
lim
0.87(1
d'Id)
where
W/
mechanical ratio of compression steel

s
yk
bd
fk
C
d'
A's
=
=
depth from compression face to centroid of compression reinforcement

area of compression reinforcement
((DD
The area of tension reinforcement can now be obtained from

Wlim
W'
Equations above for w' and
are valid for d'/x
<_
Y/805.
13.4 Flanged beams

For beams with flanges on the compression side of the section, the formulae for rectangular sections may be applied provided
xld
where
hf
<_
hfId
thickness of the flange
For beams where the neutral axis lies below the flange, it will normally be sufficiently accurate to assume that the centre of compression is located at middepth of the flange. Thus, for singly reinforced beams, approximately
30c
0.87 AsYk(d
hf/2)
The neutral axis depth is given approximately by
xld =
1.918 (b/br)W
1.25 (b/br
1)hfld
w is
where b is the rib width and the definition of rectangular section.

0
identical to that for a
13.5
Symmetrically reinforced rectangular columns

Figures 13.2(a) to (e) give non-dimensional design charts for symmetrically reinforced columns where the reinforcement can be assumed to be concentrated
in the corners. The broken lines give values of K2 in Eqn 4.73 of EC2.
T-0
Where the reinforcement is not concentrated in the corners, a conservative approach is to calculate an effective value of d' as illustrated in Figure 13.3.
Eqn 4.73
as
2
INS
iff
0
b\iF hf
m
I
1.
/
,0
0
N cn O
0 O
ow w m
Im
m
0-10 0.15
0.05
0.20
25
0.30
M
0-35
bh2fck
0-40
45
mm
w
SO
ti
0
D
0
0
7.0
ME
Figure 13.2(b)
Rectangular columns u/,p) suwnlo
0.10)
o_
%,N b,6
zs
wom
IS
0
Figure 13.2(c) Rectangular columns
IN
0.15)
252
Cn
M,
01
II
N'
No
Nho
mL%-N"N,=
Wl%k%kM6h
ME
Im
M.N&Nk
vk
ma
Owl
0.4
m
,Ml
9.
h%l
Em
Mlh
'601 ,
w
w
F
A
=
h VkAl
%kl
I&M
pr
am
hl
I
WOM ME
ml
on
mw,AW,Ar i
ME
PAF
MA
MR am
M
EM
WA MPA N
Figure 13.2(d)
Eqm m
vo
25
Rectangular columns
im
M AM
M.
s
0
91
wo.
I
kw
ENk
4
IE
m
LNL
L
0N O
I am
lh
kNLNk
0.20)
IN
Ov,
t6mk,lkc
INkN
Itmoil
Im
II
LE
EM
Im
w
VAIOAWA A
Fail
WE
Bib iblEsim7m
WA WA M
m
El
IN
WMIPAI
WE
MVR
.m
0.45
[am
h/2
-o+
dI
Centroid of bars in
half section
Figure 13.3
Method of assessing an effective value for d'
255
REFERENCES
1.
1992-1-1: 1992. London, BSI, 1992. 254 pp.
o-,
vac
2. BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. Structural use
of concrete. Part 1: Code of practice for design and construction. Part 2: Code of practice for special circumstances. Part 3: Design charts for singly reinforced beams, doubly reinforced beams and rectangular columns. BS 8110: Parts 1, 2 & 3: 1985. London, BSI, 1985. Separately paginated.
Document A. Structure. London: HMSO. 1991. 69pp.
(00m
(07
Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures. Part 1. General rules and rules for buildings (together with United Kingdom National Application Document). DD ENV
BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION.
3. DEPARTMENT OF THE ENVIRONMENT AND THE WELSH OFFICE. The
Building Regulations 1991. Approved
4. HIGGINS, J.B. & ROGERS, B.R.

25
Designed and detailed (BS 8110: 1985). Slough (now Crowthorne), C&CA (now BCA), 1986. 28 pp. (43.501)
moo
5. BEEBY, A.W. & NARAYANAN, R.S.
6. BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION.

(3)
Q.)
ago
Z(/)
Concrete
criteria. BS DD ENV 206: 1992. This document is the National Implementation of ENV 206, prestandard. The main text of this and ENV 206 are identical but this document contains the National annex. London, BSI, 1992. 38 pp.
7.
performance, production, placing and compliance

).
1988. 436 pp.
CAC/)
REYNOLDS, C.E. & STEEDMAN, J.C. Reinforced concrete
designer's handbook. London, E. & F.N. Spon,
ribbed reinforcing steel B 500
prEN 10080, 1991. Brussels, CEN. 54 pp. (Issued by BSI as a draft for comment, document no. 91-44813DC, 1991.)
Eurocode 7 Geotechnical design. London, BSI.
3Q0
8. EUROPEAN COMMITTEE FOR STANDARDIZATION.
Steel for the reinforcement of concrete - weldable - technical delivery conditions for bars, coils and welded fabric. Draft
-o
Concise Eurocode for the design of concrete buildings. Based on BSI publication DD ENV 1992-1-1: 1992. Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures. Part 1. General rules and rules for buildings. Crowthorne, BCA, 1993. 79 pp. (43.504)
C)0
(JO
Two
Z0)
late 1994.
10.
Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures. Part 3: Concrete foundations. London, BSI. To be published 1996.
11.
Code of basic data for the design of buildings. Chapter Part 2: Wind loads. CP 3, Chapter V: Part 2: 1972. London, BSI, 1972. 49 pp.
-gyp
12. ALLEN, A.H. Reinforced concrete design to BS 8110:
c)
v0)
C-0
.c?
c09
To be
published
Urn
(1)
V.
Loading.
simply explained. London, E. & F.N. Spon, 1989,
239 pp.
13.
Handbook to British Standard 8110: 1985 Structural use of concrete. Viewpoint Publication 14.015. London, Palladian Publications Ltd, 1987. 206 pp.
5.0
ROWE, R.E., SOMERVILLE, G., BEEBY, A.W., et al.
14.
BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. Structural use of steelwork in building. Part 1: Code of practice for design in simple and continuous construction: hot rolled sections. BS 5950: Part 1. London, BSI,
1990. 116 pp.

15.
INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS ORGANISATION, ISO Technical
concrete structures 9690.
- Classification of environmental conditions. Geneva, ISO.
Committee 72. Concrete and reinforced Draft proposal ISO/DP
16. COMITE EURO-INTERNATIONAL DU BETON, FIP
CEB-FiP Model Code 1990. Design code. London,
Thomas Telford, 1993. 437 pp.

Post tensioned concrete floors: Design handbook. Technical Report No. 43, Wexham, The Concrete Society, 1994. 160 pp.
CONCRETE SOCIETY
C/)
17.
18. OVE ARUP & PARTNERS and CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY RESEARCH & INFORMATION ASSOCIATION. The of deep beams in reinforced concrete. CIRIA Guide 2. London, CIRIA, 1977. 131 pp.
cod
20. BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. Eurocode 1: Basis of design BSI. To be published late 1994.
ran
r..
21. BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION. Design loading for buildings. Part 1: Code
of practice for dead and imposed loads. Part 3. Code of practice for imposed roof loads. BS 6399: Parts 1 & 3: 1984 & 1988. London, BSI, 1984188. Separately paginated.
(0O
O1-
design
Code of practice for the structural use of concrete. Part 1: Design, materials and workmanship. Part 2: Design charts for singly reinforced beams, doubly reinforced beams and rectangular columns. Part 3: Design charts for circular columns and prestressed beams. CP 110: Parts 1, 2 & 3: 1972. London, BSI, 1972. Separately paginated.
and actions on structures. London,
Worked examples for the design of concrete buildings
CI/SfB
I
I
UDC
BRITISH CEMENT ASSOCIATION PUBLICATION 43.505
624 012.4:006.77
concrete

Worked Examples For The Design of Concrete Buildings ARUP

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Deskripsi Asli:

Judul Asli

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Worked Examples For The Design of Concrete Buildings ARUP

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

WORKED

FOR THE DESIGN

This book of worked examples has been prepared by:

The work was monitored by the principal authors:

Partner, S. B. Tietz & Partners, Consulting Engineers,

BE(Hons), MSc, DIC, CEng, FIStructE

Ove Arup industry.

Partners offer consultancy services

at the above address.

structural and traffic engineering.

British Cement Association

Price group M British Cement Association 1994

FOR THE DESIGN

Published by the British Cement Association in conjunction with:

Fitzroy Street London W1 P 6BQ

The Department of the

INTRODUCTION AND SYMBOLS 5 Introduction 5 Symbols

................. .................... ................

SPECIAL DETAILS Corbels

180 ..................... 185 188 Simply supported ends

COMPLETE DESIGN EXAMPLE 15 Introduction

materials and loading

.................. ................. ..... ................... ................. ................. ..................

............... ............... ...... ..........

193 193 195

mum and max mum areas of 207 reinforcement

SERVICEABILITY CHECKS BY CALCULATION

........ ..... ...........

DEEP BEAMS Introduction 11.2 Example

............... .......... ..................

............... .................. ............... ..................

- tank ................... 245

.................. ..... ............

FOUNDATIONS Ground bearing footings Pilecap design

........... .............. ............ ........ .................

INTRODUCTION AND SYMBOLS

Introduction and symbols

Area of concrete cross-section

Area of concrete within tensile zone

columns, total longitudinal reinforcement

Area of compression reinforcement

Minimum area of tension or, in columns, total longitudinal reinforcement

Area of tension reinforcement provided

Area of surface reinforcement

Area of shear reinforcement or torsion links Minimum area of shear reinforcement

INTRODUCTION AND SYMBOLS

Secant modulus of elasticity of concrete

Modulus of elasticity of reinforcement or prestressing steel

Force in tension reinforcement or prestressing tendons at ultimate limit state

Design value of tie force in pilecap

Second moment of area of cross-section

Second moment Second moment Second moment

Second moment of Second moment of

area area area area

of column section of slab section

Deflection-curvaturefactor dependent upon the shape of the bending moment

Coefficient taking account of decrease force

curvature due to increasing axial

Bending moment Moment of force, FC, about tension reinforcement

Moment causing cracking

Moment of force, N., about y axis

Design moment of resistance